Toyota OM47828U

User Manual: Toyota 2013 Toyota Prius V Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 411

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1

QUICK GUIDE

BASIC FUNCTION

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

PHONE

129

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

188

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

267

INFORMATION

281

APPS

303

PERIPHERAL MONITORING
SYSTEM

316

INDEX

377

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

Introduction
NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL
This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this
manual carefully to ensure proper use. Keep this manual in your vehicle at all
times.
The screen shots in this document and the actual screens of the navigation system differ depending on whether the functions and/or a contract existed and the
map data available at the time of producing this document.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
The Navigation System is one of the most technologically advanced vehicle accessories ever developed. The system receives satellite signals from the Global
Positioning System (GPS) operated by the U.S. Department of Defense. Using
these signals and other vehicle sensors, the system indicates your present position and assists in locating a desired destination.
The navigation system is designed to select efficient routes from your present
starting location to your destination. The system is also designed to direct you
to a destination that is unfamiliar to you in an efficient manner. The system uses
DENSO maps. The calculated routes may not be the shortest nor the least traffic congested. Your own personal local knowledge or “short cut” may at times
be faster than the calculated routes.
The navigation system’s database includes Point of Interest categories to allow
you to easily select destinations such as restaurants and hotels. If a destination
is not in the database, you can enter the street address or a major intersection
close to it and the system will guide you there.
The system will provide both a visual map and audio instructions. The audio instructions will announce the distance remaining and the direction to turn in when
approaching an intersection. These voice instructions will help you keep your
eyes on the road and are timed to provide enough time to allow you to maneuver, change lanes or slow down.
Please be aware that all current vehicle navigation systems have certain limitations that may affect their ability to perform properly. The accuracy of the vehicle’s position depends on satellite conditions, road configuration, vehicle
condition or other circumstances. For more information on the limitations of the
system, refer to pages 126 through 128.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL
For safety reasons, this manual indicates items requiring particular attention
with the following marks.

CAUTION
● This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is
ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk
of injury to yourself and others.

NOTICE
● This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in
order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your vehicle and its equipment.

SYMBOLS USED IN ILLUSTRATIONS

Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”, “Do
not do this”, or “Do not let this happen”.

Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turning,
etc.) used to operate switches and other
devices.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL

No.

Name

Description

Operational Outlines

An outline of the operation is explained.

Main Operations

The steps of an operation are explained.

Related Operations

A main operation’s supplementary operations are described.

Information

Useful information for the user is described.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

SAFETY INSTRUCTION

To use this system in the safest possible
manner, follow all the safety tips shown
below.
This system is intended to assist in reaching the destination and, if used properly,
can do so. The driver is solely responsible
for the safe operation of your vehicle and
the safety of your passengers.
Do not use any feature of this system to
the extent it becomes a distraction and
prevents safe driving. The first priority
while driving should always be the safe operation of the vehicle. While driving, be
sure to observe all traffic regulations.
Prior to the actual use of this system, learn
how to use it and become thoroughly familiar with it. Read the entire Navigation System Owner’s Manual to make sure you
understand the system. Do not allow other
people to use this system until they have
read and understood the instructions in
this manual.
For your safety, some functions may become inoperable when driving. Unavailable screen buttons are dimmed. Only
when the vehicle is not moving, can the
destination and route selection be done.

CAUTION
● For safety, the driver should not operate
the navigation system while he/she is
driving. Insufficient attention to the road
and traffic may cause an accident.
● While driving, be sure to obey the traffic
regulations and maintain awareness of
the road conditions. If a traffic sign on
the road has been changed, route guidance may not have the updated information such as the direction of a one way
street.

While driving, listen to the voice instructions as much as possible and glance at
the screen briefly and only when it is safe.
However, do not totally rely on voice guidance. Use it just for reference. If the system cannot determine the current position
correctly, there is a possibility of incorrect,
late, or non-voice guidance.
The data in the system may occasionally
be incomplete. Road conditions, including
driving restrictions (no left turns, street closures, etc.) frequently change. Therefore,
before following any instructions from the
system, look to see whether the instruction
can be done safely and legally.
This system cannot warn about such
things as the safety of an area, condition of
streets, and availability of emergency services. If unsure about the safety of an area, do not drive into it. Under no
circumstances is this system a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgement.
Use this system only in locations where it
is legal to do so. Some states/provinces
may have laws prohibiting the use of video
and navigation screens next to the driver.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1

QUICK GUIDE

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

1. NAVIGATION OPERATION ............ 10

1. DESTINATION SEARCH ................ 56

OVERVIEW BUTTON AND
GUIDANCE SCREEN ......................... 10

DESTINATION SEARCH ....................... 56

REGISTERING HOME .......................... 12

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE ........................ 78

REGISTERING PRESET
DESTINATIONS.................................. 14
OPERATION FLOW:
GUIDING THE ROUTE ....................... 16
SETTING HOME AS
THE DESTINATION ............................ 17

2. FUNCTION INDEX........................... 18
NAVIGATION SYSTEM FUNCTION
INDEX ................................................. 18

3. QUICK REFERENCE....................... 20
“Destination” SCREEN........................... 20
“Setup” SCREEN ................................... 22
“Information” SCREEN........................... 24

BASIC FUNCTION

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE
OPERATION .................................. 26
INITIAL SCREEN................................... 26

STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE............ 74
ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN............... 78
TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE
PROMPTS ........................................... 81
DISTANCE AND TIME
TO DESTINATION............................... 84
SETTING AND DELETING
DESTINATIONS .................................. 85
SETTING ROUTE .................................. 87

3. ADDRESS BOOK ........................... 96
NAVIGATION SETTINGS ...................... 96

4. SETUP........................................... 112
DETAILED NAVIGATION
SETTINGS......................................... 112
VEHICLE SETTINGS ........................... 120

5. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING
SYSTEM) ..................................... 126
LIMITATIONS OF THE NAVIGATION
SYSTEM ............................................ 126

TOUCH SCREEN OPERATION ............ 27
INPUTTING LETTERS AND NUMBERS/
LIST SCREEN OPERATION............... 28
SCREEN ADJUSTMENT....................... 31
MAP SCREEN OPERATION ................. 33

2. SETUP ............................................. 43
GENERAL SETTINGS........................... 43
VOICE SETTINGS................................. 52

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

PHONE

1. PHONE OPERATION .................... 130
QUICK REFERENCE .......................... 130

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
OPERATION................................ 268

PHONE (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM
FOR CELLULAR PHONE) ................ 132

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM .............. 268

CALL ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE ..... 141

EXPANDED VOICE COMMANDS....... 276

RECEIVE ON THE Bluetooth®
PHONE ............................................. 148

TALK ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE ..... 149

Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE
FUNCTION........................................ 152

2. SETUP ........................................... 155
PHONE SETTINGS............................. 155
Bluetooth® SETTINGS ........................ 177

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
OPERATION ................................ 190
QUICK REFERENCE .......................... 190
SOME BASICS.................................... 192
RADIO OPERATION ........................... 199
HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY
INFORMATION ................................. 202
RADIO OPERATION (XM Satellite
Radio BROADCAST) ........................ 206

NATURAL SPEECH INFORMATION
(ENGLISH ONLY) ............................. 274

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

COMMAND LIST ................................. 277

INFORMATION

1. INFORMATION DISPLAY............. 282
FUEL CONSUMPTION ........................ 282

MAP DATABASE VERSION AND
COVERAGE AREA ........................... 283

2. XM FUNCTION-OVERVIEW ......... 285

XM SERVICES .................................... 285

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION ....... 286
XM Sports ............................................ 286

XM Stocks ............................................ 289
XM Fuel Prices..................................... 292
XM NavWeather™ ............................... 295

XM NavTraffic® .................................... 298

4. SETUP........................................... 301
XM SETTINGS..................................... 301

RADIO OPERATION (INTERNET
RADIO BROADCAST) ...................... 212
9

DVD PLAYER OPERATION................ 213
USB MEMORY OPERATION.............. 233
iPod OPERATION ............................... 238
Bluetooth® AUDIO OPERATION......... 242
AUDIO/VIDEO REMOTE CONTROLS
(STEERING SWITCHES) ................. 252
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
OPERATING HINTS ......................... 254

2. SETUP ........................................... 264
AUDIO SETTINGS .............................. 264

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

TABLE OF CONTENTS
8

APPS

1. ENTUNE-OVERVIEW .................... 304
ENTUNE SERVICE ............................. 304
BEFORE USING ENTUNE .................. 306

2. ENTUNE OPERATION .................. 308
ACTIVATING “APPS” .......................... 308
LINKING “APPS” AND NAVIGATION
LOCAL FUNCTION ........................... 311
INPUTTING KEYWORD
OPERATION ..................................... 313

PERIPHERAL MONITORING
SYSTEM

1. REAR VIEW MONITOR
SYSTEM ....................................... 318
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
OPERATION ..................................... 318

2. ADVANCED PARKING
GUIDANCE SYSTEM................... 322
INTRODUCTION ................................. 322
MANEUVERING WHEN PARKING ..... 324
PARKING ASSIST MODE
(PERPENDICULAR PARKING) ........ 330
PARALLEL PARKING ASSIST
MODE................................................ 344
WHAT TO DO WHEN THIS SORT
OF MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED ......... 355
MANUAL GUIDE LINE DISPLAY
MODE................................................ 360
USAGE PRECAUTIONS ..................... 366

INDEX
ALPHABETICAL INDEX ................... 378

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1
QUICK GUIDE
1

NAVIGATION OPERATION

1. OVERVIEW BUTTON AND
GUIDANCE SCREEN................... 10
2. REGISTERING HOME ................... 12

3. REGISTERING PRESET
DESTINATIONS ........................... 14
4. OPERATION FLOW:
GUIDING THE ROUTE................. 16
5. SETTING HOME AS THE
DESTINATION ............................. 17

FUNCTION INDEX

1. NAVIGATION SYSTEM FUNCTION
INDEX........................................... 18

QUICK REFERENCE

1. “Destination” SCREEN................. 20
2. “Setup” SCREEN .......................... 22
3. “Information” SCREEN................. 24

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. NAVIGATION OPERATION

1. OVERVIEW BUTTON AND GUIDANCE SCREEN

No.

Name

Function

Page

North-up
or
heading-up symbol

This symbol indicates whether the map orientation is set to north-up or heading-up. Touching
this symbol changes the map orientation. Both
north-up and heading-up symbols display the vehicles direction as a letter (e.g. N for north).

Scale indicator

This figure indicates the map scale.

“SETUP” button

Press to display the “Setup” screen.

22, 31, 43,
52, 96, 112,
120, 155,
177, 264,
301

“INFO/APPS”
(“INFO”) button

Press to display the “Information” screen.
For vehicles sold in Canada, the “INFO” button is
used instead of the “INFO/APPS” button.

24, 282,
283, 286,
289, 292,
295, 298,
308, 311

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. NAVIGATION OPERATION

No.

Name

Function

Page

Touch to reduce the map scale.

“ Off”

Touch to obtain a broader view. Some of the buttons on the screen will not be displayed. They are
displayed again by touching “On ”.

116

“Mark”

Touch to register the current position or the cursor position as an address book entry.

“Route”

Touch to change the route.

85, 87

“Show on Map”

Touch to browse information about guidance
route, to set the POI (Point of Interest) icons to be
displayed on the screen, to record the route, etc.

92, 299

Zoom in button

Touch to magnify the map scale.

“Map Mode”

Touch to display the “Map Mode” screen.

“MAP/VOICE”
button

Press to repeat a voice guidance, cancel the
screen scroll, start guidance, and display the current position.

“DEST” button

Press to display the “Destination” screen.

Distance
and
time to destination

Touch to display the distance, estimated travel
and arrival time to the destination.

XM indicator

This mark is displayed when XM information is received.

297, 299

“GPS” mark (Global Positioning
System)

Whenever the vehicle is receiving signals from
the GPS, this mark is displayed.

126

QUICK GUIDE

Zoom out button

12, 14, 16,
17, 20, 56

*: Press and hold the “PWR VOL” knob for 3 seconds or more to turn off the screen and restart the
navigation system. Do this when the vehicle-mounted device response is extremely slow.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. NAVIGATION OPERATION

2. REGISTERING HOME
1

Press the “DEST” button.

There are 4 different methods to
search your home. (See “DESTINATION SEARCH” on page 56.)

Touch “Go Home”.

Touch “Enter”.

If a home address has not been registered, it can be registered by touching
“Go Home”.

The “Edit Home” screen is displayed.

Touch “Yes”.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. NAVIGATION OPERATION

Touch “OK”.

QUICK GUIDE

Registration of home is complete.
Home can also be registered by touching “Navigation” on the “Setup” screen.
(See “REGISTERING HOME” on page
97.)
The name, location, phone number and
icon can be changed. (See “EDITING
HOME” on page 98.)
The registered points can be used on
the “Destination” screen. (See “DESTINATION SEARCH BY HOME” on page
57.)

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. NAVIGATION OPERATION

3. REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS
1

Press the “DEST” button.

There are 4 different methods to
search preset destinations. (See
“DESTINATION SEARCH” on
page 56.)

Touch one of the preset destination buttons.

Touch “Enter”.

A preset destination can be set to any
preset destination button that has not
yet been set.

The “Edit Preset Destination” screen is
displayed.

Touch “Yes”.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. NAVIGATION OPERATION

Touch “OK”.

QUICK GUIDE

Registration of preset destinations is
complete.
Preset destinations can also be registered by touching “Navigation” on the
“Setup” screen. (See “REGISTERING
PRESET DESTINATIONS” on page 99.)
The name, location, phone number and
icon can be changed. (See “EDITING
PRESET DESTINATIONS” on page
100.)
The registered points can be used on
the “Destination” screen. (See “DESTINATION SEARCH BY PRESET DESTINATIONS” on page 57.)

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. NAVIGATION OPERATION

4. OPERATION FLOW: GUIDING THE ROUTE
1

Press the “DEST” button.

Touch “Go to

”.

The navigation system performs a
search for the route.

There are 10 different methods to
search destinations. (See “DESTINATION SEARCH” on page 56.)

Touch “OK”, and start driving.

Page 1

Page 2

Routes other than the one recommended can also be selected. (See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 74.)
Guidance to the destination is displayed
on the screen and can be heard via
voice guidance.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. NAVIGATION OPERATION

5. SETTING HOME AS THE DESTINATION
1

Press the “DEST” button.

Touch “OK”, and start driving.

Touch “Go Home”.

Guidance to the destination is displayed
on the screen and can be heard via
voice guidance.

“Go Home” can be used if your home
address has been registered. (To register home, see “REGISTERING HOME”
on page 97.)
Your home address is set as the destination. The navigation system performs
a search for the route.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

QUICK GUIDE

Routes other than the one recommended can also be selected. (See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 74.)

2. FUNCTION INDEX

1. NAVIGATION SYSTEM FUNCTION INDEX
Map
Displaying maps

Page

Viewing the map screen

Displaying the current position

Viewing the current position vicinity map

Changing the scale

Changing the map orientation

Displaying Points of Interest

Displaying the estimated travel/arrival time to the destination

Selecting the map mode

Deleting map screen buttons

116

Displaying traffic information

298

Searching destinations

Page

Searching the destination

Changing the selected search area

Operating the map location of the selected destination

Route guidance
Before starting route guidance

Page

Setting the destination

Viewing alternative routes

Starting route guidance

Before starting or during route guidance

Page

Viewing the route

Adding destinations

Changing the route

Displaying the estimated travel/arrival time to the destination

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. FUNCTION INDEX

During route guidance

Page

Pausing route guidance

Adjusting route guidance volume

Deleting the destination

Displaying the entire route map

QUICK GUIDE

Useful functions
Address book

Page

Registering address book entries

101

Marking icons on the map

103
Information

Displaying vehicle maintenance
Hands-free system (for cellular phone)
Initiating

Bluetooth®

Page
120
Page
132

Making a call on a Bluetooth® phone

141

Receiving a call on the Bluetooth® phone

148

Voice command system
Operating the system with your voice

Page
268

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

3. QUICK REFERENCE

1. “Destination” SCREEN
The “Destination” screen enables a destination search. Press the “DEST” button
to display the “Destination” screen.

No.

Name

Function

Page

“Address”

Touch to input a house number and the street address using the input keys.

“Point of Interest”

Touch to select one of the POIs that have already
been stored in the system’s database.

“Previous
Destinations”

Touch to select a destination from any of the last
100 previously set destinations and from the previous starting point.

“Address Book”

Touch to select the desired location from a registered entry in “Address book”. (To register address book entries, see “REGISTERING
ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES” on page 102.)

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

3. QUICK REFERENCE

No.

Name

Function

Page

Touch to delete set destinations.

“Emergency”

Touch to select one of the 4 categories of emergency service points that have already been
stored in the system’s database.

“Intersection &
Freeway”

Touch to enter the names of 2 intersecting streets
or a freeway (interstate) entrance or exit. This is
helpful if only the general vicinity, not the specific
address, is known.

“Map”

Touch to enable setting a destination by touching
a location on the map screen.

“Coordinates”

Touch to enter latitude and longitude coordinates.

Preset
destination
buttons

Touch to select one of the 5 preset destination
points as a destination. If a preset destination
point has not been registered, a message will be
displayed asking if it is desirable to set a destination to the preset screen button. (To register a
preset destination, see “REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS” on page 99.)

“Go Home”

Touch to select your personal home address
without having to enter the address each time. If
a home address has not been registered, a message will be displayed and the setting screen will
automatically appear. (To register home, see
“REGISTERING HOME” on page 97.)

QUICK GUIDE

“Del.Dest.”

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

3. QUICK REFERENCE

2. “Setup” SCREEN
The items shown on the “Setup” screen can be set. Press the “SETUP” button to
display the “Setup” screen.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

3. QUICK REFERENCE

No.

Name

Function

Page

“General”

Touch to change the selected language, operation sound, automatic screen change settings,
etc.

“Voice”

Touch to set the voice guidance settings.

“Navigation”

Touch to set home, preset destinations, address
book, areas to avoid, etc. or to delete previous
destinations.

“Display”

Touch to adjust the contrast and brightness of the
screens, turn the display off, etc.

“Vehicle”

Touch to set vehicle information such as maintenance information.

120

“Other”

Touch to set XM Sports, XM Stocks and XM Fuel
Prices.

301

“Audio”

Touch to set iPod and HD Radio™ channel settings.

264

“Bluetooth*”

Touch to set Bluetooth® phones and Bluetooth®
audio devices.

177

“Phone”

Touch to set the phone sound, phonebook, message settings, etc.

155

QUICK GUIDE

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

3. QUICK REFERENCE

3. “Information” SCREEN
This screen can be used to display the XM satellite system, fuel consumption, etc.
Press the “INFO/APPS” (“INFO”) button to display the “Information” screen.

No.

Name

Function

Page

“Apps”

Touch to display the “Apps” screen.

308, 311

“Fuel
Consumption”

Touch to display the fuel consumption screen.

282

“Traffic Incidents”

Touch to display traffic incidents.

298

“Map Data”

Touch to display map data information.

283

“XM Fuel Prices”

Touch to display current fuel prices and gas station locations information.

292

“XM
NavWeather”

Touch to display weather information.

295

“XM Stocks”

Touch to display personally selected stocks information.

289

“XM Sports”

Touch to display personally selected sports
teams information.

286

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2
BASIC FUNCTION
1

BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE
OPERATION

1. INITIAL SCREEN .......................... 26
2. TOUCH SCREEN OPERATION.... 27

3. INPUTTING LETTERS AND
NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN
OPERATION ............................... 28

4. SCREEN ADJUSTMENT .............. 31
SCREEN SETTINGS ADJUSTMENT .... 31

5. MAP SCREEN OPERATION......... 33

CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY ........... 33
SCREEN SCROLL OPERATION .......... 33
SWITCHING THE SCREENS ................ 38

MAP SCALE .......................................... 41
ORIENTATION OF THE MAP ............... 41
STANDARD MAP ICONS ...................... 42

SETUP

1. GENERAL SETTINGS .................. 43
SCREENS FOR GENERAL
SETTINGS .......................................... 43

2. VOICE SETTINGS......................... 52
SCREEN FOR VOICE SETTINGS ........ 52

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

1. INITIAL SCREEN
1

When the “POWER” switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode, the initial
screen will be displayed and the system will begin operating.

MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
This system reminds users when to replace certain parts or components and
shows dealer information (if registered) on the screen.
When the vehicle reaches a previously
set driving distance or date specified
for a scheduled maintenance check,
the “Maintenance Reminder” screen
will be displayed when the navigation
system is turned on.

 Images shown on the initial screen can
be changed to suit individual preferences. (See page 48.)

CAUTION
● When the vehicle is stopped with the
hybrid system operating, always apply
the parking brake for safety.
 After a few seconds, the “CAUTION”
screen will be displayed.

 This screen goes off if the screen is not
operated for several seconds.
 To prevent this screen from being displayed again, touch “Do Not Display
This Message Again”.
 To register maintenance information,
see “MAINTENANCE” on page 120.

 After about 5 seconds, the “CAUTION”
screen automatically switches to the map
screen. (If a button other than the “MAP/
VOICE” button is pressed, the function’s
corresponding screen will be displayed.)
 When the navigation system is turned
on in a screen other than the map
screen, the “CAUTION” screen will be
displayed when the screen is changed
to the map screen for the first time after
it has been turned on.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

2. TOUCH SCREEN OPERATION
This system is operated mainly by the
buttons on the screen. (Referred to as
screen buttons in this manual.)
 When a screen button is touched, a
beep sounds. (To set the beep sound,
see page 43.)

NOTICE

● If the system does not respond to touching a screen button, move your finger
away from the screen and then touch it
again.
● Dimmed screen buttons cannot be operated.
● To operate the touch screen, press
touch screen buttons properly with finger
pad.
● When dew condensation occurs inside
the touch screen, it is sometimes difficult
to operate the display properly. In such
case, please leave the screen
untouched and do not operate the touch
screen until dew condensation disappears.
● The displayed image may become
darker and moving images may be
slightly distorted when the screen is
cold.
● In extremely cold conditions, the map
may not be displayed and the data input
by a user may be deleted. Also, the
screen buttons may be harder than
usual to depress.
● When the screen is viewed through
polarized sunglasses, a rainbow pattern
may appear on the screen due to optical
characteristics of the screen. If this is
disturbing, please operate the screen
without polarized sunglasses.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

BASIC FUNCTION

● To prevent damaging the screen, lightly
touch the screen buttons with your finger
pad.
● Do not operate or rub the screen with a
ballpoint pen, a mechanical pencil, finger nail, a pointy and/or hard object
because this will damage the screen.
● Do not objects other than your finger to
touch the screen.
● When wiping the touch screen, it is
advisable to wipe with a soft and dry
cloth wrapped around the finger. Do not
use chemical cleaners to clean the
touch screen, as they may damage the
touch screen. Also, be careful not to
apply excessive force on the screen.

INFORMATION

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

3. INPUTTING LETTERS AND NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN OPERATION
When searching for an address or
name, or entering data, letters and
numbers can be input via the screen.

 On certain letter entry screens, letters can
be entered in upper or lower case.
Icon

Touch to enter in lower case.

 Keyboard layout can be changed. (See
page 47.)

Touch to enter in upper case.

TO INPUT LETTERS AND
NUMBERS

Touch “A-Z” to display the alphabet
keys.

Touch the keys directly to enter letters
or numbers.

: Touch to erase one character.
Touch and hold to continue erasing characters.

Function

TO INPUT SYMBOLS

Touch “Other” to display symbol keys.

Touch the symbol keys directly to enter
symbols.

: Touch to erase one symbol. Touch
and hold to continue erasing symbols.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

TO DISPLAY THE LIST

Touch “OK” to search for an address
or a name.

LIST SCREEN OPERATION
When a list is displayed, use the appropriate screen button to scroll through
the list.

Icon

Function
Touch to skip to the next or previous page.
Touch and hold
or
to scroll
through the displayed list.
This indicates the
screen’s position.

INFORMATION

● The number of matching items is shown
on the right side of the screen. If the
number of matching items is more than
999, the system displays “” on the
screen.

displayed

If
appears to the right of an
item name, the complete name is
too long to display.
Touch
to scroll to the end of the
name.
Touch
to move to the beginning of the name.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

BASIC FUNCTION

 Matching items from the database are
listed even if the entered address or name
is incomplete.
 The list will be displayed automatically if
the maximum number of characters is
entered or the number of matching items
is 5 or less.

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

SORTING
The order of a list displayed on the
screen can be rearranged.

Touch “Sort”.

Screen button

Function

“Distance”

Touch to sort in order of
distance from the current
position.

“Date”

Touch to sort in order of
date.

“Category”

Touch to sort in order of
category.

“Icon”

Touch to sort in order of
icon.

“Name”

Touch to sort in order of
name.

“Brand”

Touch to sort in order of
brand name. (XM functions)

“Price”

Touch to sort in order of
price. (XM functions)

Touch the desired sorting criteria.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

4. SCREEN ADJUSTMENT
The contrast and brightness of the
screen display and the image the camera displays can be adjusted. The display can also be turned off, and/or
changed to either day or night mode.
(For information regarding audio/video
screen adjustment, see “AUDIO
SCREEN ADJUSTMENT” on page
224.)

“Camera”: Touch to adjust the image
the camera displays.
Adjusting the image the camera displays

ADJUSTING SCREEN DISPLAY
AND CAMERA SETTINGS

Press the “SETUP” button.

“Map·Menu”: Touch to return to the
screen display settings.
CONTRAST AND BRIGHTNESS
ADJUSTMENT

Touch “Display”.

The contrast and brightness of the
screen can be adjusted according to
the brightness of your surroundings.
The display can also be turned off.

Touch “ ” or “ ” to select the desired
function (“Contrast” or “Brightness”).

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

BASIC FUNCTION

SCREEN SETTINGS
ADJUSTMENT

Adjusting the screen display

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

Touch the desired screen button to adjust contrast and brightness.
Screen button

Function

“Contrast” “+”

Touch to strengthen the
contrast of the screen.

“Contrast” “-”

Touch to weaken the
contrast of the screen.

“Brightness” “+”

Touch to brighten the
screen.

“Brightness” “-”

Touch to darken the
screen.

CHANGING BETWEEN DAY
AND NIGHT MODE
Depending on the position of the headlight switch, the screen changes to day
or night mode.

To display the screen in day mode,
even with the headlight switch on,
touch “Day Mode” for brightness and
contrast control.

After adjusting the screen, touch
“OK”.

 The screen goes off when “Screen Off” is
touched. To turn the screen back on,
press any button. The selected screen
appears.

 If the instrument panel light control switch
is turned fully to upper, the displays condition is not changed to night mode even if
headlight switch is turned on.
INFORMATION

● If the screen is set to day mode with the
headlight switch turned on, this condition
is memorized even with the hybrid system turned off.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

5. MAP SCREEN OPERATION
CURRENT POSITION
DISPLAY
When starting the navigation system,
the current position is displayed first.
This screen displays the current position and a map of the surrounding area.

INFORMATION

● After 12-volt battery disconnection, or on
a new vehicle, the current position may
not be correct. As soon as the system
receives signals from the GPS, the correct current position is displayed.

SCREEN SCROLL
OPERATION

mark (

 The current position mark ( ) appears in
the center or bottom center of the map
screen.
 A street name will appear on the bottom of
the screen, depending on the scale of the
map ( ).
 The screen can be returned to this map
screen that shows the current position at
any time, from any screen by pressing the
“MAP/VOICE” button.
 To correct the current position manually,
see page 117.
INFORMATION

● While driving, the current position mark
is fixed on the screen and the map
moves.
● The current position is automatically set
as the vehicle receives signals from the
GPS (Global Positioning System). If the
current position is not correct, it is automatically corrected after the vehicle
receives signals from the GPS.

 Use the scroll feature to move the desired
point to the center of the screen for looking at a point on the map that is different
from the current position.
 If a finger touches and holds the map
screen, it will continue scrolling in that
direction until the finger is removed.
 A street name, city name, etc. of the
touched point will be shown, depending
on the scale of the map (
from the current position to
shown (

). Distance
will also be

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

BASIC FUNCTION

When any point on the map is touched,
that point moves to the center of the
screen and is shown by the cursor

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

 After the screen is scrolled, the map
remains centered at the selected location until another function is activated.
The current position mark will continue
to move along your actual route and
may move off the screen. When the
“MAP/VOICE” button is pressed, the
current position mark returns to the center of the screen and the map moves as
the vehicle proceeds along the designated route.
 When the scroll feature is used, the current position mark may disappear from
the screen. Press the “MAP/VOICE”
button to display the current position on
the map screen.

TO SET THE CURSOR
POSITION AS A DESTINATION

TO REGISTER THE CURSOR
POSITION AS AN ADDRESS
BOOK ENTRY
Address book entry registration enables easy access to a specific point.

Touch “Mark”.

This screen is displayed.

A specific point on the map can be set
as a destination using the scroll function.

Touch “Enter

”.

 The registered point is shown by
map.

on the

 To change the icon or name, etc., see
“EDITING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES”
on page 102.
 The screen changes and displays the map
location of the selected destination and
the route preference. (See “STARTING
ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 74.)

INFORMATION

● Up to 100 address book entries can be
registered. If there is an attempt to register more than 100 address book entries,
an error message will appear.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

TO SEE INFORMATION ABOUT
THE ICON WHERE THE
CURSOR IS SET

 If “Enter
” is touched, the cursor
position will be set as a destination.
 If a destination has already been set,
“Go Directly” and “Add to Route” will
be displayed.

“Go Directly”: Touch to delete the existing destination(s) and set a new one.
“Add to Route”: Touch to add a destination.

■POI INFORMATION
When the cursor is set on a POI icon,
the name and “Info” are displayed at
the top of the screen.

Touch “Info”.

Information such as the name, address, position and phone number are
displayed.

 If
is touched, the registered
phone number can be called.
 The desired POI can be displayed on
the map screen. (See “DISPLAY POI
ICONS” on page 92.)

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

BASIC FUNCTION

 To display information about an icon, set
the cursor on it.

 To register this POI as an address book
entry, touch “Mark”. (See “REGISTERING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES” on
page 102.)

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

■ADDRESS BOOK ENTRY INFORMATION

When the cursor is set on an address
book entry icon, the name and “Info”
are displayed at the top of the screen.

Touch “Info”.

 If “Enter
” is touched, the cursor
position will be set as a destination.
 If a destination has already been set,
“Go Directly” and “Add to Route” will
be displayed.

“Go Directly”: Touch to delete the existing destination(s) and set a new one.
“Add to Route”: Touch to add a destination.

 To edit an address book entry, touch
“Edit”. (See “EDITING ADDRESS
BOOK ENTRIES” on page 102.)
 To delete an address book entry, touch
“Delete”.

 If
is touched, the registered
phone number can be called.

Information such as the name, address, position and phone number are
displayed.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

■DESTINATION INFORMATION
When the cursor is set on a destination
icon, the name and “Info” are displayed on the top of the screen.

Information such as the name, address, position and phone number are
displayed.

TION

When the XM NavTraffic® icon on the
map screen is touched, the XM
NavTraffic® information bar will appear
on the upper part of the screen.

Touch “Info”.

Traffic information will be displayed on
the screen.

BASIC FUNCTION

Touch “Info”.

■XM NavTraffic® TEXT INFORMA-

 To delete a destination, touch “Delete”.
 If
is touched, the registered
phone number can be called.

 To display detailed traffic event information, touch “Detail”.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

SWITCHING THE SCREENS
Any of the screen configurations can
be selected.

Screen button

Function

“Intersection”

Touch to display the intersection guidance screen
or the guidance screen on
the freeway. (See page
79.)

“Audio”

Touch to display the audio
screen. (See page 39.)

“Fuel Consumption”

Touch to display the fuel
consumption screen. (See
page 39.)

“Other Information”

Touch to display the following 4 screen configurations:
“Dual
map”,
“Compass”, “Turn-by-Turn
Arrow” and “Freeway Exit
List”.

“Dual map”

Touch to display the dual
map screen. (See page
39.)

“Compass”

Touch to display the compass mode screen. (See
page 40.)

“Turn-by-Turn
Arrow”

Touch to display the turnby-turn arrow screen.
(See page 80.)

“Freeway Exit
List”

Touch to display the freeway exit list screen. (See
page 78.)

Touch “Map Mode”.

Touch the screen buttons to select the
desired configuration.

 Depending on the conditions, certain
screen configuration buttons cannot be
selected.
Screen button

Function

“Map Only”

Touch to display the single
map screen. (See page
39.)

“Turn List”

Touch to display the turn
list screen. (See page 80.)

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

SCREEN CONFIGURATIONS

■MAP ONLY

■FUEL CONSUMPTION
The fuel consumption screen and the
map screen are displayed.

This is a regular map screen.

 While on a different screen, touching
“Map Only” will display the single map
screen.

■AUDIO
The audio screen and the map screen
are displayed.

 Touching “ ” or “ ” allows selection of
the desired mode (“Energy Monitor”, “Trip
Information” or “Past Record”).
 If a different screen is displayed, touch
“Fuel Consumption” on the “Map
Mode” screen.
 For an explanation on each fuel consumption mode, refer to “FUEL CONSUMPTION”. (See page 282.)

■DUAL MAP
The map screen can be split into two.

 Information on the current radio station or
track is displayed.
 If a different screen is displayed, touch
“Audio” on the “Map Mode” screen.
 For audio system operation, refer to
“AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION”. (See page 190.)

 This screen shows the dual map. The map
on the left is the main map.
 While on a different screen, touching
“Dual map” will display the dual map
screen.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

BASIC FUNCTION

 The screen shows the single map.

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

■EDITING RIGHT MAP
The right side map can be edited by
touching any point on the right side
map.

The current position is indicated with a
compass.

Touch the desired screen button.

 The following procedures can be performed on this screen:
No.

Function
Changing the orientation of the map
Displaying POI icons
Showing XM NavTraffic® information
(See page 299.)
Changing the map scale

■COMPASS

Touch “OK” when editing is completed.

 Information about the destination, current
position and a compass is displayed on
the screen.
 While on a different screen, touching
“Compass” will display the compass
mode screen.
INFORMATION

● The destination mark is displayed in the
direction of the destination. When driving, refer to the longitude and latitude
coordinates, and the compass, to make
sure that the vehicle is headed in the
direction of the destination.
● When the vehicle travels out of the coverage area, the guidance screen
changes to the compass mode screen.

 The screen returns to the dual map
screen.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

MAP SCALE

ORIENTATION OF THE MAP

Touch
or
to change the scale
of the map screen.

The orientation of the map can be
changed from north-up to heading-up
by touching the orientation symbol at
the top left of the screen.

Touch

North-up screen

BASIC FUNCTION

 The scale bar and indicator at the bottom
of the screen indicate the map scale
menu. The scale range is from 150 ft. (50
m) to 250 miles (400 km).
 Touch and hold
or
to continue
changing the scale of the map screen.
 The scale of the map screen can be
changed by touching the scale bar
directly. This function is not available while
driving.

Heading-up screen

INFORMATION

● The map scale is displayed under the
north-up or heading-up symbol at the
top left of the screen.
● When the map scale is at the maximum
range of 250 miles (400 km),
is not
shown. When the map scale is at the
minimum range of 150 ft. (50 m),
not shown.

: North-up symbol
Regardless of the direction of vehicle travel, north is always up.
: Heading-up symbol
The direction of vehicle travel is always up.
 Both the north-up and heading-up symbols display the vehicles direction as a
letter (e.g. N for north).

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

STANDARD MAP ICONS
Icon

Name
Island
Park
Industry
Business facility
Airport
Military
University
Hospital
Stadium
Shopping mall
Golf

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

1. GENERAL SETTINGS
Used for language selection and the
on/off settings of operation sounds and
automatic screen change, etc.

SCREENS FOR GENERAL
SETTINGS

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “General”.

Touch the items to be set.

BASIC FUNCTION

 On this screen, the following functions can
be performed:

Touch “Save”.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

No.

Function
Touch to change the time zone and
select “On” or “Off” for daylight saving time. (See “SYSTEM TIME SETTINGS” on page 45.)
Touch to change the language. (See
“SELECTING A LANGUAGE” on
page 46.)
Touch to change the distance unit.
(See “UNIT OF MEASUREMENT” on
page 46.)

No.

Function
Touch to set automatic screen
changes from the audio/video control
screen to the previous screen to
“On” or “Off”. If “On” is touched,
the screen will automatically return to
the previous screen from the audio/
video screen after 20 seconds.
Touch to delete personal data. (See
“DELETING PERSONAL DATA” on
page 51.)

Touch to turn the sound beeps “On”
or “Off”.

Touch to update program versions.
For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

Touch to change the screen button
color. (See “SELECTING A BUTTON
COLOR” on page 47.)

Touch to update gracenote database
versions. For details, contact your
Toyota dealer.

Touch to change the keyboard layout. (See “SELECTING A KEYBOARD LAYOUT” on page 47.)
Touch to customize the startup image. (See “CHANGING THE STARTUP IMAGE” on page 48.)
Touch to customize the screen off
image. (See “CHANGING THE
SCREEN OFF IMAGE” on page 50.)

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

SYSTEM TIME SETTINGS
Used for changing time zones and the
on/off settings of daylight saving time.

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “System Time”.

A time zone can be selected and GMT
can be set.

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “System Time”
“General Settings” screen.

Touch “Time Zone”.

Touch the desired time zone.

Touch “General” on the “Setup”
screen.
on

the

Touch the items to be set.

 On this screen, the following functions can
be performed:
No.

Function
Touch to change the time zone. (See
“TIME ZONE” on page 45.)

 If “Other” is touched, the zone can be
adjusted manually. Touch “+” or “-” to
adjust the time zone and then touch
“OK”.

Touch to select “On” or “Off” for
daylight saving time.

Touch “Save”.

BASIC FUNCTION

Touch “General” on the “Setup”
screen.

■TIME ZONE

Touch “Save”.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

SELECTING A LANGUAGE
The language can be changed.

UNIT OF MEASUREMENT
Distance unit can be changed.

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Language”.

Touch “Unit of Measurement”.

Touch the desired screen button.

Touch “km” or “mile”.

Touch “Yes”.

 The previous screen will be displayed.

Touch “General” on the “Setup”
screen.

 The previous screen will be displayed.

Touch “Save”.

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.
Touch “General” on the “Setup”
screen.

Touch “Save”.

 This function is available only in English
or Spanish. To change language, see
“SELECTING A LANGUAGE” on page
46.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

SELECTING A BUTTON COLOR
The color of the screen buttons can be
changed.

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.

SELECTING A KEYBOARD
LAYOUT
Keyboard layout can be changed.

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Button Color”.

Touch “Keyboard Layout”.

Touch the desired screen button color.

Touch “ABC” or “QWERTY” of “Keyboard Layout” to change the keyboard
layout.

Touch “General” on the “Setup”
screen.

BASIC FUNCTION

 The previous screen will be displayed.

Touch “Save”.

 The previous screen will be displayed.

Touch “Save”.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

■LAYOUT TYPE
“ABC” type

CHANGING THE STARTUP
IMAGE
When the “POWER” switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode, the initial
screen will be displayed.

“QWERTY” type

An image can be copied from a USB
memory and used as the startup image. (For information regarding the
startup image, see “INITIAL SCREEN”
on page 26.)
INFORMATION

● When saving the images to a USB,
name the folder that the startup image is
saved to “StartupImage” and name the
folder that the screen off image is saved
to “DisplayOffImage”. If these folder
names are not used, the navigation system cannot download the images. (The
folder names are case sensitive.)
● The images file extension is JPG or
JPEG.
● The images file name, including the file
extension, can be up to 32 characters.
● Image files of 10 MB or less can be
saved.
● Up to 3 images can be downloaded.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

■TRANSFERRING DATA

■SETTING THE STARTUP IMAGE

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Customize Startup Image”
on the “General Settings” screen.

Touch the desired image.

Touch “Save”.

Open the cover and connect a USB
memory.

Touch “General” on the “Setup”
screen.

BASIC FUNCTION

 Turn on the power of the USB memory if it
is not turned on.

2
3

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Customize Startup Image”.

Touch “General” on the “Setup”
screen.

Touch “Transfer”.

Touch “Yes”.

■DELETING TRANSFERRED IMAGES

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Customize Startup Image”
on the “General Settings” screen.

Touch “Delete All”.

Touch “Yes”.

Touch “General” on the “Setup”
screen.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

CHANGING THE SCREEN OFF
IMAGE
Touch “Screen Off” to turn off the
screen. An image can be copied from a
USB memory and can be set to display
when “Screen Off” is touched. (For
more information on “Screen Off”,
see “SCREEN ADJUSTMENT” on
page 31.)

Touch “Transfer”.

Touch “Yes”.

■TRANSFERRING DATA

■SETTING THE SCREEN OFF IMAGE

1
2

Open the cover and connect a USB
memory.

Press the “SETUP” button.
Touch “General” on the “Setup”
screen.

Touch “Customize Screen Off Image” on the “General Settings” screen.

Touch the desired image.

Touch “Save”.

 Turn on the power of the USB memory if it
is not turned on.

2
3

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Customize Screen Off Image”.

Touch “General” on the “Setup”
screen.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

■DELETING TRANSFERRED IMAGES

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Customize Screen Off Image” on the “General Settings” screen.

Touch “Delete All”.

Touch “Delete”.

Touch “Yes”.

Touch “General” on the “Setup”
screen.

Touch “Yes”.

DELETING PERSONAL DATA

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Delete Personal Data”.

Touch “General” on the “Setup”
screen.

 The following personal data can be
deleted or returned to their default settings:
• Maintenance conditions
• Maintenance information off setting
• Address book
• Areas to avoid
• Previous points
• Route guidance
• Route trace
• Phonebook data
• Call history data
• Speed dial data
• Bluetooth® phone data
• Phone sound settings
• Phone display settings
• Message settings
• Audio setting
• Bluetooth® audio setting
• Startup image data
• Screen off image data
• Downloaded Apps
INFORMATION

● This function is not available while driving.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

BASIC FUNCTION

2. SETUP

2. VOICE SETTINGS
Voice guidance etc. can be set.

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Voice”.

SCREEN FOR VOICE
SETTINGS

 On this screen, the following functions can
be performed:

Touch the items to be set.

No.

Function
The voice guidance volume can be
adjusted or switched off. (See
“VOICE VOLUME” on page 53.)
Voice guidance during route guidance can be set to “On” or “Off”.
Voice guidance during audio system
use can be set to “On” or “Off”.

Touch “Save”.

Voice recognition prompts can be set
to “On” or “Off”. This setting can
also be changed on the “Shortcut
Menu” screen. (See page 268.)
When “On” is selected, the audio/
video system can be operated using
voice commands.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

No.

TRAFFIC INCIDENT WARNING

Function
When using the traffic information
function, voice guidance can be set
to “On” or “Off”. (See “TRAFFIC INCIDENT WARNING” on page 53.)
When using the XM NavWeather™
function, the severe weather warning
can be set to “On” or “Off”.

 To reset all setup items, touch “Default”.

Traffic congestion information can be
received via voice guidance while being guided to the desired destination.
Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Save”.

Touch “Voice” on the “Setup” screen.
Touch “On” of “Traffic Incident Warning”.

VOICE VOLUME
The voice guidance volume can be adjusted or switched off.

1
2
3

Press the “SETUP” button.
Touch “Voice” on the “Setup” screen.
Select the desired level by touching the
appropriate number.

INFORMATION

● When the “Traffic Information” indicator is dimmed, “Avoid Traffic”, “Traffic
Incident Warning” and “Show Free Flowing Traffic” will not operate. (See page
295.)

 If voice guidance is not needed, touch
“Off” to disable the feature.

Touch “Save”.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

BASIC FUNCTION

1
2
3

3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM

DESTINATION SEARCH

1. DESTINATION SEARCH............... 56
SELECTING THE SEARCH AREA ........ 56
DESTINATION SEARCH BY HOME...... 57
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
PRESET DESTINATIONS................... 57
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Address” ............................................. 58
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Point of Interest” ................................. 61
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Previous Destinations”........................ 67
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Address Book” .................................... 68
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Emergency” ........................................ 68
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Intersection & Freeway”...................... 69
DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Map” ....... 71
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Coordinates” ....................................... 72
DELETING SET DESTINATIONS.......... 72

2. STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE ... 74

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
1

ROUTE GUIDANCE

1. ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN....... 78

1. NAVIGATION SETTINGS ............. 96
SETTING UP THE
“Preset Destinations” ........................... 99
SETTING UP THE “Areas to Avoid” .... 106
DELETING PREVIOUS
DESTINATIONS ................................ 110

4. SETTING AND DELETING
DESTINATIONS........................... 85

DELETING DESTINATIONS ................. 86

5. SETTING ROUTE .......................... 87

SCREENS FOR NAVIGATION
SETTINGS ........................................ 112

ROUTE OVERVIEW.............................. 88
PAUSING AND RESUMING
GUIDANCE ......................................... 91

SETUP

1. DETAILED NAVIGATION
SETTINGS................................. 112

DETOUR SETTING ............................... 87
ROUTE PREFERENCE ........................ 89

SETTING UP THE “Address Book” ..... 101

3. DISTANCE AND TIME
TO DESTINATION ....................... 84

REORDERING DESTINATIONS........... 85

SETTING UP THE “Home” .................... 97

2. TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE
PROMPTS.................................... 81

ADDING DESTINATIONS ..................... 85

ADDRESS BOOK

2. VEHICLE SETTINGS .................. 120

MAINTENANCE................................... 120
VEHICLE CUSTOMIZATION ............... 125

SHOW ON MAP .................................... 92

ROUTE TRACE..................................... 95

GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING
SYSTEM)

1. LIMITATIONS OF
THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM .... 126

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

1. DESTINATION SEARCH
1

Press the “DEST” button.

SELECTING THE SEARCH
AREA
The selected state (province) can be
changed to set a destination from a different state (province) by using “Address”, “Point of Interest” or
“Intersection & Freeway”.

1
2

This screen is displayed.

 One of 10 different methods can be used
to search a destination. (See pages 57
through 72.)
INFORMATION

● When searching a destination, the
response to the screen button may be
slow.

Touch “Change State/Province” to
display a list of the states/provinces/
territories of the United States and
Canada.

 For map database information and
updates, see “MAP DATABASE VERSION AND COVERAGE AREA” on
page 283.
 If a state (province) has not been
selected yet, “Select State/Province”
is displayed.

Touch the desired state (province).

 The previous screen will be displayed.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

DESTINATION SEARCH BY
HOME

1
2

Press the “DEST” button.
Touch “Go Home”.

DESTINATION SEARCH BY
PRESET DESTINATIONS

1
2

Press the “DEST” button.
Touch any of the preset destination
buttons (1-5).

Touch “OK”.

 To use this function, it is necessary to
set a home address. (To register home,
see page 97.)
INFORMATION

● If a home address has not been registered, a message confirming if it is desirable to set a home will be displayed, and
the setting screen will appear.
● Guidance starts from the current position to the set home address if “OK” is
touched even while driving.

 The selected preset destination point is
set as the destination. The navigation system performs a search for the route. (See
“STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on
page 74.)

Touch “OK”.

 To use this function, it is necessary to
set preset destinations to the preset
screen buttons (1-5). (See “REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS” on
page 99.)
INFORMATION

● If a preset destination point has not been
registered, a message confirming if it is
desirable to set a preset destination will
be displayed, and the setting screen will
appear.
● Guidance starts from the current position to the preset destination point if
“OK” is touched even while driving.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

 Your home address is set as the destination. The navigation system performs a
search for the route.

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

SELECTING A CITY TO
SEARCH

DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Address”
There are 2 methods to search a destination by address:
(a)Search by city
(b)Search by street address

1
2

Press the “DEST” button.

Select the desired search method.

1
2

Press the “DEST” button.

Touch “City”.

Input a city name.

Touch the screen button of the desired
city name from the displayed list.

Touch “Address” on the “Destination”
screen.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

Input the street name and touch “OK”.

When the desired street name is
found, touch the corresponding screen
button.

Input a house number.

CITIES

Touch “Last 5 Cities”.

Touch the screen button of the desired
city name from the displayed list.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

■SEARCHING FROM THE LAST 5

 The current screen changes to the
screen for inputting a street name. (See
“SELECTING A CITY TO SEARCH” on
page 58.)
INFORMATION

● If the navigation system has never been
used, this function will not be available.

 If the same address exists in more than 1
city, the current screen changes to the
address list screen.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

SEARCH BY STREET
ADDRESS

1
2

Press the “DEST” button.

Touch “Street Address”.

When the desired street name is
found, touch the corresponding screen
button.

Touch “Address” on the “Destination”
screen.

Touch numbers directly on the screen
to input the house number.

 After inputting the house number, touch
“OK” to display the screen for inputting
the street name.

Input the street name and touch “OK”.

 When the desired street name is selected,
the “Confirm Destination” screen may be
displayed. If “Go” is touched on the “Confirm Destination” screen, the navigation
system performs a search for the route.
(See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on
page 74.)
 If the same address exists in more than 1
city, a screen requesting the city name to
be input or selected will be displayed.

Input a city name.

Touch the screen button of the desired
city name from the displayed list.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

SEARCH BY “Name”

INFORMATION

● A street name can be searched using
only the body part of its name.
● For example: S WESTERN AVE
• A search can be performed by inputting “S WESTERN AVE”, “WESTERN
AVE” or “WESTERN”.

DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Point of Interest”

1
2

Press the “DEST” button.

Touch “Name” on the “Point of Interest” screen.

Input the name of the POI.

Touch “Point of Interest” on the
“Destination” screen.

There are 3 methods to search a destination by Points of Interest:
(b)Search by category
(c)Search by phone #

1
2

Press the “DEST” button.

Select the desired search method.

Touch the screen button of the desired
destination.

Touch “Point of Interest” on the
“Destination” screen.

 When the desired destination is selected,
the “Confirm Destination” screen may be
displayed. If “Go” is touched on the “Confirm Destination” screen, the navigation
system performs a search for the route.
(See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on
page 74.)
 When inputting the name of a specific
POI, and there are 2 or more sites with the
same name, the list screen is displayed.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

(a)Search by name

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

Touch the screen button of the desired
destination.

 If the same name exists in more than 1
city, a search can be performed more easily using “City” or “Category”. (See
“SELECTING A CITY TO SEARCH” on
page 62 and “SELECTING FROM THE
CATEGORIES” on page 63.)

■SELECTING A CITY TO SEARCH

Touch “City”.

Input the city name.

 The desired POI can be displayed on
the map screen. (See “DISPLAY POI
ICONS” on page 92.)
INFORMATION

● To search for a facility name using multiple search words, put a space between
each word.

 To cancel the city setting, touch “Any
City”.

Touch the screen button of the desired
city name from the displayed list.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

■SELECTING FROM THE CATEGORIES

Touch “Category”.

SEARCH BY “Category”
The destination can be set by touching
the search point and the POI category.

1
2

Press the “DEST” button.

Touch “Category”.

Touch “Point of Interest” on the
“Destination” screen.

Touch the screen button of the desired
category.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

This screen is displayed.

 If the desired POI category is on the
screen, touch its screen button to display
a detailed list of the POI category.
 If the desired POI category is not on the
screen, touch “List All Categories” to list
all POI categories.
 On this screen, the following operations
can be performed:
No.

Function
Touch to set the search point from
near the current position.

 When the desired category is touched, the
POI name list screen is displayed.

Touch to set the search point from
along the selected route.
Touch to set the search point from
near a city center.
Touch to set the search point from
near a destination.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

INFORMATION

● The names of POIs located within
approximately 200 miles (320 km) from
the selected search point can be displayed.

■SETTING THE SEARCH POINT
FROM NEAR CITY CENTER

1
2

Touch “Near a City Center in XX*”.

Touch the screen button of the desired
city center name.

Input the city center name.

■SETTING THE SEARCH POINT
FROM NEAR HERE

Touch “Near Here”.

 The search point is set at the current position, and the “POI Category” screen will be
displayed. (See page 66.)

■SETTING THE SEARCH POINT
FROM ALONG MY ROUTE

Touch “Along My Route”.

 The search point is set and the “POI Category” screen will be displayed. (See page
66.)

 The search point is set and the “POI Category” screen will be displayed. (See page
66.)
*: XX represents the selected search area
name.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

■SELECTING FROM THE LAST 5

■SETTING THE SEARCH POINT

1
2

CITIES

Touch “Near a City Center in XX*”.
Touch “Last 5 Cities”.

FROM NEAR A DESTINATION
Touch “Near a Destination”.

Touch the screen button of the desired
destination.

Touch the screen button of the desired
city center name.

 The search point is set and the “POI Category” screen will be displayed. (See page
66.)

 The search point is set and the “POI Category” screen will be displayed. (See page
66.)
*: XX represents the selected search area
name.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

■TO SEARCH FOR POIs NEAR THE
SEARCH POINT

Touch the screen button of the desired
item.

When the search point is set, the “POI
Category” screen will be displayed.

Touch the desired POI category.

 If the desired POI category is not on the
screen, touch “List All Categories” to list
all POI categories.
 If “Favorite POI Categories” is touched,
a search can be performed using the 6
POIs that have been previously set. For
more details, see “POI CATEGORY
CHANGE (SELECT POI ICONS)” on page
115.

 When the desired item is selected, the
“Confirm Destination” screen may be displayed. If “Go” is touched on the “Confirm
Destination” screen, the navigation system performs a search for the route. (See
“STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on
page 74.)

Touch the desired POI category from
the list.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

SEARCH BY “Phone #”

1
2

Press the “DEST” button.

Touch “Phone #” on the “Point of Interest” screen.

Input a phone number.

Touch “Point of Interest” on the
“Destination” screen.

INFORMATION

● If there is no match for the phone number input, a list of identical numbers with
different area codes will be displayed.

DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Previous Destinations”

1
2

Touch “Previous Destinations” on
the “Destination” screen.
Touch the screen button of the desired
destination.

After inputting a phone number, touch
“OK”.

 When a phone number is input, the “Confirm Destination” screen may be displayed. If “Go” is touched on the “Confirm
Destination” screen, the navigation system performs a search for the route. (See
“STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on
page 74.)
 If there is more than 1 site with the same
number, the following screen will be displayed.

 The previous starting point and up to 100
previously set destinations are displayed
on the screen.

“Delete”: Touch to delete the previous
destination. (To delete previous destinations, see page 72.)

 To set an address book entry as a destination using the phone number, the
number must already be registered with
the address book entry. (See page 105.)

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Press the “DEST” button.

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

 The list of previous destinations can
also be deleted by touching “Delete
Previous Dest.” on the “Navigation
Settings” screen when the vehicle is
stopped. (See “DELETING PREVIOUS
DESTINATIONS” on page 110.)

DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Address Book”

1
2

Press the “DEST” button.

Touch the screen button of the desired
address book entry.

DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Emergency”

1
2

Press the “DEST” button.
Touch “Emergency” on the “Destination” screen.

 The display changes to a screen to select
police stations, dealers, hospitals or fire
stations.

Touch “Address Book” on the “Destination” screen.

Touch the desired emergency category.

 The selected emergency category is displayed.

4
 A list of registered address book entries is
displayed.

Touch the screen button of the desired
destination.

“Options”: Touch to register or edit address book entries. (See page 102.)

 When the desired address book entry is
selected, the “Confirm Destination” screen
may be displayed. If “Go” is touched on
the “Confirm Destination” screen, the navigation system performs a search for the
route. (See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 74.)

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

SEARCH BY “Intersection”

INFORMATION

● The navigation system does not guide in
areas where route guidance is unavailable. (See page 127.)
● The emergency function can be used
even while driving.
● While driving, only the currently displayed items and the items on the next
page can be viewed.

DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Intersection & Freeway”

1
2

Press the “DEST” button.
Touch “Intersection & Freeway” on
the second page of the “Destination”
screen.

Touch “Intersection” on the “Intersection & Freeway” screen.

Input the name of the first intersecting
street which is located near the destination to be set, and touch “OK”.

(a)Search by intersection
(b)Search by freeway

1
2

Press the “DEST” button.

Select the desired method.

Touch “Intersection & Freeway” on
the second page of the “Destination”
screen.

Touch the screen button of the desired
item.

Input the name of the second intersecting street.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

There are 2 methods to search a destination by Intersection & Freeway:

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

Touch the screen button of the desired
item.

SEARCH BY “Freeway
Entrance / Exit”

1
2

Press the “DEST” button.
Touch “Intersection & Freeway” on
the second page of the “Destination”
screen.

Touch “Freeway Entrance / Exit” on
the “Intersection & Freeway” screen.

Input a freeway name.

Touch the screen button of the desired
freeway.

Select “Entrance” or “Exit”.

INFORMATION

● If the same 2 streets cross at more than
1 intersection, the screen changes and
displays the menu to select the city
name where the streets intersect. Select
the city, and the map location of the
selected destination and the route preference. (See “STARTING ROUTE
GUIDANCE” on page 74.)

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

Input a freeway entrance or exit name,
and touch “OK”.

DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Map”

1
2

Press the “DEST” button.

Scroll the map to the desired point.

Touch “Map” on the second page of
the “Destination” screen.

Touch the screen button of the desired
entrance or exit name.

 When the desired entrance or exit is
selected, the “Confirm Destination” screen
may be displayed. If “Go” is touched on
the “Confirm Destination” screen, the navigation system performs a search for the
route. (See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 74.)

Touch “Go to

”.

 The navigation system performs a search
for the route. (See “STARTING ROUTE
GUIDANCE” on page 74.)
INFORMATION

● Guidance starts if “OK” is touched even
while driving. However, the cursor cannot be moved.

INFORMATION

● Be sure to use the complete name of the
freeway or highway, including the
hyphen, when entering the destination.
Freeways and interstates use an “I”
(I-405). US highways use the state designation before the number (CA-118).

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Coordinates”

1
2

Press the “DEST” button.

Input the latitude and the longitude.

Touch “Coordinates” on the second
page of the “Destination” screen.

DELETING SET
DESTINATIONS
A set destination can be deleted.

1
2

Press the “DEST” button.
Touch “Del.Dest.” on the “Destination” screen.

 When more than 1 destination is set, a list
will be displayed on the screen.

Touch the destination to be deleted.

After inputting the latitude and longitude, touch “OK”.

 When the desired screen button is
selected, the “Confirm Destination” screen
may be displayed. If “Go” is touched on
the “Confirm Destination” screen, the navigation system performs a search for the
route. (See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 74.)

“Delete All”: Touch to delete all destinations on the list.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

Touch “Yes” to delete the destination(s).

 A message appears to confirm the request
to delete.
 If “Yes” is touched, the data cannot be
recovered. If more than 1 destination has
been set, the system will recalculate the
route(s) to the set destination(s) as necessary.
 If “No” is touched, the previous screen
will be displayed.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

 Set destinations can also be deleted by
touching “Route”. (See “DELETING
DESTINATIONS” on page 86.)

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

2. STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE
When “Map” is touched on the “Confirm Destination” screen, the map
screen will be displayed. The map location of the selected destination can
be set as a destination.

Scroll the map to the desired point.

 If a destination has already been set,
“Go to ” and “Add to Route” will be
displayed.

“Go to ”: Touch to delete the existing
destination(s) and set a new one.
“Add to Route”: Touch to add a destination.
“Info”: If this screen button is displayed
on the top of the screen, touch it to view
items such as name, address, position
and phone number.

To start guidance, touch “OK”.

“Adjust Location”: Touch to adjust the
position in smaller increments.

No.

Function
Current position

 When an arrow facing the desired point is
touched, the map scrolls in that direction.
 The scroll stops when the selection of the
arrow is released.

Destination point

Distance of the entire route

Touch “Go to

”.

Type of route and its distance

 The system starts route search and displays recommended routes.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

No.

Function
Touch to display a list of the turns required to reach the destination.
Touch to select the desired route
from 3 possible routes. (See page
76.)
Touch to change the route. (See
page 77.)

CAUTION

● The route for returning may not be the
same as that for going.
● The route guidance to the destination
may not be the shortest route nor a
route without traffic congestion.
● Route guidance may not be available if
there is no road data for the specified
location.
● When setting the destination on a map
with a scale larger than 0.5 miles (800
m), the map scale changes to 0.5 miles
(800 m) automatically. If this occurs, set
the destination again.
● If a destination that is not located on a
road is set, the vehicle will be guided to
the point on a road nearest to the destination. The road nearest to the point
selected is set as the destination.

● Be sure to obey traffic regulations and
keep road conditions in mind while driving. If a traffic sign on the road has been
changed, the route guidance may not
indicate such changed information.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

 Guidance can be paused or resumed.
(See “PAUSING AND RESUMING
GUIDANCE” on page 91.)
 If “OK” is touched until a beep sounds,
demo mode will start. Press the “MAP/
VOICE” button to end demo mode.

INFORMATION

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

3 ROUTES SELECTION

Touch “3 Routes”.

No.

Function
Time necessary for the entire trip

Touch “Preferred”, “Alternate” or
“Short”.

Distance of the entire trip
Toll road
Freeway
Ferry

No.

Function
Touch to display the recommended
route.
Touch to display the alternative
route.
Touch to display the route that is the
shortest distance to the set destination.
Touch to display the information
shown below about each of the 3
routes.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

EDIT ROUTE
Conditions for the route to the destination can be set again.

This screen is displayed.

Function

Page

Touch to add destinations.

Touch to delete destinations.

Touch to reorder destinations.

Touch to display the choices available when setting
the conditions the system
uses to determine the route
to the destination.

89
3

INFORMATION

● Even if the “Freeways” indicator is
dimmed, the route cannot avoid including a freeway in some cases. (See page
89.)
● If the calculated route includes a trip by
ferry, the route guidance shows a sea
route. After you travel by ferry, the current position may be incorrect. Upon
reception of GPS signals, it is automatically corrected.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Touch “Edit Route”.

No.

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

1. ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN
During route guidance, various types
of guidance screens can be displayed
depending on conditions.
SCREEN LAYOUT

No.

DURING FREEWAY DRIVING
During freeway driving, the freeway
exit information screen will be displayed.
This screen displays the distance to
the next junction/exit, or POIs in the vicinity of the freeway exit.

Function
Distance to the next turn and an arrow indicating the turning direction
Guidance route

No./
Icon

Function

Current position

Distance from the current position to
the exit or junction

Distance and travel/arrival time to
the destination

Exit number and junction name

Current street name

Current position
POIs that are close to a freeway exit

INFORMATION

● If the vehicle goes off the guidance
route, the route is searched again.
● For some areas, the roads have not
been completely digitized in our database. For this reason, the route guidance may select a road that should not
be traveled on.
● When arriving at the set destination the
destination name will be displayed on
the top of the screen. Touching “Off”
clears the display.

Current street name
Touch to display the selected map of
the exit vicinity.
Touch to scroll to farther junctions or
exits.
Touch to scroll to closer junctions or
exits.
Touch to display the closest 3 junctions or exits.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

WHEN APPROACHING A
FREEWAY EXIT OR JUNCTION
When the vehicle approaches an exit
or junction, the freeway guidance
screen will be displayed.

WHEN APPROACHING AN
INTERSECTION
When the vehicle approaches an intersection, the intersection guidance
screen will be displayed.

Function

No.

Function

Next street name

Current position

Distance from the current position to
the exit or junction

Distance to the intersection

: Touch to hide the freeway guidance
screen.
 Touch “Intersection”, or press the “MAP/
VOICE” button, to change back to the
freeway guidance screen.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

No.

: Touch to hide the intersection guidance screen.
 Touch “Intersection”, or press the “MAP/
VOICE” button, to change back to the
intersection guidance screen.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

OTHER SCREENS

■TURN LIST SCREEN
On this screen, the list of turns on the
guidance route can be viewed.

Touch “Turn List” during guidance to
display the turn list.

■ARROW SCREEN
On this screen, information about the
next turn on the guidance route can be
viewed.

Touch “Turn-by-Turn Arrow” during
guidance to display the arrow screen.

No.
No.

Function
Turn direction
Distance between turns
Next street or destination name

Function
Exit number or street name
Turn direction
Distance to the next turn
Current street name

Current street name

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

2. TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE PROMPTS
As the vehicle approaches an intersection, or point, where maneuvering the
vehicle is necessary, the system’s
voice guidance will provide various
messages.

4 miles
0.5 miles

5 miles
0.5 miles
No.

Voice guidance
“Proceed about 5 miles to Main
street.”
“In half of a mile, right turn onto Main
street.”

“Proceed about 4 miles to the traffic
circle.”

“In half of a mile, traffic circle ahead
and then the 3rd exit onto Main
street.”

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

No.

Voice guidance

“The 3rd exit ahead.”
“The exit ahead.”
(Beep sound only)

“Next right.”/“Right turn ahead.”
(Beep sound only)
INFORMATION

● The street names may not be pronounced correctly or clearly due to the
text-to-speech function.
● On freeways, interstates or other highways with higher speed limits, the voice
guidance will be made at earlier points
than on city streets in order to allow time
to maneuver the vehicle.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

*: The system indicates a U-turn if the distance between 2 one-way roads (of opposite directions) is less than 50 ft. (15 m) in
residential areas or 164 ft. (50 m) in nonresidential areas.
No.

Voice guidance
“In half of a mile, make a legal Uturn.”
“Make a legal U-turn ahead.”
(Beep sound only)

 The system announces the approach to
the final destination.
No.

Voice guidance
“In half of a mile, your destination is
ahead.”
“Your destination is ahead.”
“You have arrived at your destination. The route guidance is now finished.”

 If a voice guidance command cannot be
heard, press the “MAP/VOICE” button
to hear it again.
 To adjust the voice guidance volume,
see “VOICE VOLUME” on page 53.
INFORMATION

● If the system cannot determine the current position correctly (in cases of poor
GPS signal reception), the voice guidance may be early or late.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

■ROUTES INCLUDING IPD ROADS
Even when on IPD roads (roads that
are not completely digitized in our database), you will be guided along the
searched route via voice guidance.

CAUTION
● Be sure to obey the traffic regulations
and keep the road condition in mind
especially when you are driving on IPD
roads. The route guidance may not have
the updated information such as the
direction of a one way street.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

 After it has made a route calculation, the
system will advise the user whether IPD
roads are included in the route or not.
 The portion of the route that covers IPD
roads is indicated by light blue.
No.

Voice guidance
“On the way to your destination,
there will be roads with incomplete
data.”
“In half of a mile, left turn.”
“Next left. Upcoming roads have incomplete data. Please carefully observe the local traffic restrictions, as
they may not match the navigation
guidance.”

 IPD roads are roads that are not yet
completely digitized in our database.
However, their geometry, name and
administrative coding are already
known.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

3. DISTANCE AND TIME TO DESTINATION
When the vehicle is on the guidance
route, the distance and the estimated
travel/arrival time to the destination are
displayed. When the vehicle is not on
the guidance route, the distance and
direction of the destination are displayed.
When driving on the guidance route
with more than 1 destination set, the
distance and estimated travel/arrival
time from the current position to each
destination are displayed.

Touch the screen button indicated by
the arrow.

Icon

Function
Estimated travel time is displayed.
Estimated arrival time is displayed.
Touch to switch to estimated arrival time.
Touch to switch to estimated
travel time.
Displayed while driving off the
guidance route. The destination
direction is indicated by an arrow.

INFORMATION

Touch the number screen button to
display the desired destination.

● When the vehicle is on the guidance
route, the distance measured along the
route is displayed. Travel time and
arrival time are calculated based on the
set vehicle speed information. (See
“DRIVING SPEEDS” on page 113.)
However, when the vehicle is not on the
guidance route, the distance is the linear
distance between the current position
and the destination.

 The distance, estimated travel time and
estimated arrival time from the current
position to the selected destination are
displayed.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

4. SETTING AND DELETING DESTINATIONS
ADDING DESTINATIONS
Destinations can be added and routes
can be searched again.

Touch “Route”.

REORDERING
DESTINATIONS
When more than 1 destination is set,
the arrival order of the destinations can
be changed.

Touch “Route”.

Touch “Add”.

Input an additional destination in the
same way as a destination search.
(See “DESTINATION SEARCH” on
page 56.)
Touch the desired “Add Destination
Here” to insert the new destination into
the route.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Touch “Reorder”.

Touch the desired destination and
touch “Move Up” or “Move Down” to
change the arrival order.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

After selecting the destinations, touch
“OK”.

Touch the destination to be deleted.

 The system searches for the guidance
route again, and displays the entire route.

DELETING DESTINATIONS
A set destination can be deleted.

Touch “Route”.

“Delete All”: Touch to delete all destinations on the list.
 A message appears to confirm the request
to delete.

Touch “Delete”.

Touch “Yes” to delete the destination(s).

 If “Yes” is touched, the data cannot be
recovered. If more than 1 destination has
been set, the system will recalculate the
route(s) to the set destination(s) as necessary.
 If “No” is touched, the previous screen
will be displayed.

 When more than 1 destination is set, a list
will be displayed on the screen.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

5. SETTING ROUTE
DETOUR SETTING
While the route guidance is operating,
the route can be changed to detour
around a section of the route where a
delay is caused by road repairs, or an
accident, etc.

Touch “Route”.

“1 mile (km)”, “3 miles (km)” or “5 miles
(km)”: Touch one of these screen buttons
to start the detour process. After detouring,
the system returns to the original guidance
route.
“Whole Route”: Touch to make the system calculate an entire new route to the
destination.
“Around Traffic”: Touch to make the system search for the route based on the traffic congestion information received from
XM NavTraffic®. For details, see “XM
NavTraffic®” on page 298.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

INFORMATION

Touch “Detour”.

● This picture shows an example of how
the system would guide around a delay
caused by a traffic jam.

Touch a screen button to select the desired detour distance.

This position indicates the location of a
traffic jam caused by road repairs, an
accident, etc.
This route indicates the detour suggested by the system.
● When the vehicle is on a freeway, the
detour distance selections are 5, 15 and
25 miles (or 5, 15 and 25 km if units are
in km).
● The system may not be able to calculate
a detour route depending on the
selected distance and surrounding road
conditions.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

TURN LIST

ROUTE OVERVIEW

Touch “Route”.

Touch

to skip to the next page

of the list of roads. Touch and hold
or

to scroll through the list of roads.

Touch “Overview”.
: This mark indicates the direction in
which you should turn at the intersection.

“Map”: The selected point is displayed
on the map screen.

The entire route from the current position to the destination is displayed.

INFORMATION

No.

Function
Touch to display a list of the turns required to reach the destination.
Touch to start guidance.

● However, not all road names in the route
may appear on the list. If a road
changes its name without requiring a
turn (such as on a street that runs
through 2 or more cities), the name
change will not appear on the list. The
street names will be displayed in order
from the starting point, along with the
distance to the next turn.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

ROUTE PREFERENCE

The entire route from the starting point
to the destination is displayed.

TO SELECT ROUTE TYPE
The Preferred, Short or Alternative
route can be selected.

Touch “Route”.
“OK”: Touch to start guidance.
“Edit Route”: Touch to change a route.
(See page 77.)

TO SELECT ROUTE FEATURES
Touch “Preferences”.

A number of choices are available
when setting the conditions the system
uses to determine the route to the destination.

1
3

Touch “Route”.

Touch “Preferred”, “Short” or “Alternate” and touch “OK”.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

Touch “Preferences” to display conditions that can be selected when the
system determines the route to the
destination.

STARTING ROUTE FROM
ADJACENT ROAD
The route guidance can be started
from an adjacent road.
(e.g. When route guidance is set on the
freeway, but the vehicle is driven parallel along the freeway.)

Touch “Route”.

Touch “Preferences”.

Touch “Start from Adjacent Road”.

Select the desired route preferences.

 The system will avoid using routes that
include items whose indicators are off.

After selecting the desired route preference, touch “OK”.

INFORMATION

● When there is no adjacent road, this
screen button will not be displayed.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

PAUSING AND RESUMING
GUIDANCE

TO RESUME GUIDANCE

Touch “Route”.

Touch “Resume Guidance”.

TO PAUSE GUIDANCE

Touch “Pause Guidance”.

 The map screen, with the current position
displayed, will be returned to.

 The screen will return to the current position map without route guidance.
INFORMATION

● Without route guidance, “Pause Guidance” cannot be used.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Touch “Route”.

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

SHOW ON MAP

 A screen with a limited choice of POIs will
be displayed. (To change the displayed
POI list, see page 115.)

DISPLAY POI ICONS
POI icons such as gas stations and
restaurants can be displayed on the
map screen. Their location can also be
set as a destination and used for route
guidance.

Touch “Show on Map”.

Touch “Select POI” to display a particular type of POI icon on the screen.

 When the POI icons to be displayed on
the map screen have already been set,
“Change POI” is displayed.

SELECTING POI ICONS TO BE
DISPLAYED
Up to 5 categories of icons can be displayed on the map screen.

Touch the desired POI category to display POI location icons on the map
screen.

 By touching the desired POI category and
then touching “OK”, the selected POI
icons are displayed on the map screen.
 To turn off the POI icons on the map
screen, touch “Clear”.

“Other POIs”: Touch to display other
POIs categories if the desired POIs cannot
be found on the limited choice screen.
“Find Local POI”: Touch to search for the
nearest POIs. Then select one of the categories. The system will list the points within
20 miles (32 km). (See page 93.)

Touch “Other POIs” on the “Select
POI Icons” screen.

 When a POI category is selected from
either the limited list or the complete list,
the icons of those locations will be displayed on the map screen.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

Touch the desired POI categories.

TO DISPLAY THE LOCAL POI
LIST
Points of Interest that are within
20 miles (32 km) of the current position
will be listed from among the selected
categories.

Touch “Find Local POI”.

 The selected category’s icon will appear
on the top left of the screen.
 By touching the desired POI category and
then touching “OK”, the selected POI
icons are displayed on the map screen.
 If the desired POI category is not on the
screen, touch “List All Categories” to list
all POI categories.

 Touch the desired POI categories from the
list.
• The selected category icon appears on
the top left of the screen.
• By touching the desired POI category
and then touching “OK”, the selected
POI icons are displayed on the map
screen.
• To return to the POI category selection
screen, touch “More”.

Touch the screen button of the desired
POI.

 The selected POIs are displayed on the
map screen.

“Near...”: Touch to search for POIs near
the current position or along the route.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

When the desired POI overlaps with the
cursor, touch “Enter ”.

 The screen changes and displays the map
location of the selected destination and
route preference. (See “STARTING
ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 74.)

TO HIDE POI ICONS
No.

Function

Touch “Show on Map”.

Touch “POI Icons”.

Touch to display the list of POIs near
the current position.
Touch to display the list of POIs
along the route.

TO SET A POI AS A
DESTINATION
One of the Point of Interest icons can
be selected on the map screen as a
destination and can be used for route
guidance.

Directly touch the desired POI icon to
set it as a destination.
 The “POI Icons” indicator is dimmed.
 The map screen will be displayed with the
POI icons hidden.
 To display the POI icons again, touch
“POI Icons” on the “Show on Map”
screen.

 The map will shift so that the icon is centered on the screen and overlaps with the
cursor
. At this time, the distance from
the current position is displayed on the
screen. The distance shown is measured
as a straight line from the current position
to the POI.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

TO STOP RECORDING THE
ROUTE TRACE

ROUTE TRACE
Up to 124 miles (200 km) of the traveled route can be stored and retraced
on the display.

Touch “Show on Map”.

Touch “Route Trace”.

INFORMATION

● This feature is available when the map
scale is more than 30 miles (50 km).

TO START RECORDING THE
ROUTE TRACE

Touch “Show on Map”.

Touch “Route Trace”.

 Touching “Yes” stops recording and the
route trace remains displayed on the
screen.
 Touching “No” stops recording and the
route trace is erased.

 The “Route Trace” indicator is highlighted.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

3. ADDRESS BOOK

1. NAVIGATION SETTINGS
Points or areas on the map can be registered.
The registered points can be used on
the “Destination” screen. (See “DESTINATION SEARCH BY HOME” on
page
57,
and
“DESTINATION
SEARCH BY “Address Book”” on page
68.)
Registered areas to avoid, will be
avoided when the system searches for
a route.

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Navigation”.

Touch the desired items to be set.

No.

Function

Page

Touch to set home.

Touch to set preset destinations.

Touch to set the address
book.

101

Touch to set areas to
avoid.

106

Touch to delete previous
destinations.

110

Touch to set detailed navigation settings.

112

 On this screen, the following operations
can be performed:
96

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

3. ADDRESS BOOK

REGISTERING HOME

SETTING UP THE “Home”
If home has been registered, that information can be recalled by touching
“Go Home” on the “Destination”
screen.
(See
“DESTINATION
SEARCH BY HOME” on page 57.)

1
2
3

Press the “SETUP” button.
Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Home” on the “Navigation Settings” screen.

Touch “Set Home”.

Touch “Home”.

Touch the desired screen button.

Touch the desired screen button and
enter the location in the same way as
for a destination search. (See “DESTINATION SEARCH” on page 56.)

 When registration of home is completed,
the “Edit Home” screen will be displayed.
No.

Function

Page

Registering home

Editing home

Deleting home

Touch “OK”.

 To edit registered information, see
“EDITING HOME” on page 98.

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

5
4

Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.

3. ADDRESS BOOK

EDITING HOME

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Home” on the “Navigation Settings” screen.

Touch “Edit”.

Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.

“Show Name on Map”: The name of a
home can be set to be displayed on the
map by touching “On” or “Off”. (See page
104.)

Touch “OK”.

DELETING HOME

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Home” on the “Navigation Settings” screen.

Touch “Delete”.

Touch “Yes” to delete home and touch
“No” to cancel the deletion.

Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.

Touch “Edit” next to the item to be edited.

No.

Function

Page

Touch to edit the home
name. The name can be
displayed on the map.

104

Touch to edit location information.

104

Touch to edit the phone
number.

105

Touch to change the icon
to be displayed on the map.

103

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

3. ADDRESS BOOK

REGISTERING PRESET
DESTINATIONS

SETTING UP THE “Preset
Destinations”
If preset destination has been registered, that information can be recalled
by using “Preset Destinations” on
the “Navigation Settings” screen. (See
“DESTINATION SEARCH BY PRESET DESTINATIONS” on page 57.)

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Preset Destinations” on the
“Navigation Settings” screen.

Touch “Set”.
3

Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
Touch “Preset Destinations”.

Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.

Touch the desired screen button and
enter the location in the same way as
for a destination search. (See “DESTINATION SEARCH” on page 56.)

Touch the desired screen button.

No.

Function

Page

Registering a preset destination

Editing a preset destination

100

Deleting a preset destination

101

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Press the “SETUP” button.

1
2

3. ADDRESS BOOK

Touch a position for this preset destination.

Touch the screen button of the desired
preset destination.

 When registration of a preset destination
is completed, the “Edit Preset Destination”
screen will be displayed.

Touch “Edit” next to the item to be edited.

Touch “OK”.

 To edit registered information, see
“EDITING PRESET DESTINATIONS”
on page 100.

EDITING PRESET
DESTINATIONS

Function

Page

Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.

104

Touch to edit the preset
destination name. The
name can be displayed on
the map.

Touch “Preset Destinations” on the
“Navigation Settings” screen.

Touch to edit location information.

104

Touch “Edit”.

Touch to edit the phone
number.

105

Touch to change the icon
to be displayed on the map.

103

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.

No.

“Show Name on Map”: The name of a preset destination can be set to be displayed
on the map by touching “On” or “Off”.
(See page 104.)

Touch “OK”.

100

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

3. ADDRESS BOOK

DELETING PRESET
DESTINATIONS

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.
Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.

Touch “Preset Destinations” on the
“Navigation Settings” screen.

Touch “Delete”.

SETTING UP THE “Address
Book”
Points or areas on the map can be registered.

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Address Book”.

Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3

6
7

Touch the preset destination to be deleted.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Touch the desired screen button.

Function

Page

Touch to select all preset
destinations.

Registering address book
entries

102

Touch to cancel the
“Select All” function.

Editing address book entries

102

Deleting address book entries

105

Screen button

Function

“Select All”
“Unselect All”

Touch “Delete”.

No.

Touch “Yes” to delete the preset destination and touch “No” to cancel the
deletion.

101

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

3. ADDRESS BOOK

REGISTERING ADDRESS
BOOK ENTRIES

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Address Book” on the “Navigation Settings” screen.

Touch “New”.

INFORMATION

● Up to 100 address book entries can be
registered.

Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.

Touch the desired screen button and
enter the location in the same way as
for a destination search. (See “DESTINATION SEARCH” on page 56.)

EDITING ADDRESS BOOK
ENTRIES
The icon, name, location and/or phone
number of a registered address book
entry can be edited.

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.

Touch “Address Book” on the “Navigation Settings” screen.

Touch “Edit”.

Touch the screen button of the desired
address book entry.

 After the address book entry has been
registered, the “Edit Address Book Entry”
screen will be displayed.

Touch “OK”.

 To edit registered information, see
“EDITING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES”
on page 102.

102

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

3. ADDRESS BOOK

Touch “Edit” next to the item to be edited.

No.

Function

Page

104

Touch to edit location information.

104

Touch to edit the phone
number.

105

Touch to change the icon
to be displayed on the map.

103

“Show Name on Map”: The name of an address book entry can be set to be displayed on the map by touching “On” or
“Off”. (See page 104.)

Touch “OK”.

Touch “Edit”.

Touch the desired icon.

 Change pages by touching the “Page 1”,
“Page 2” or “With Sound” tab.

■SOUND ICONS
A sound for some address book entries
can be set. When the vehicle approaches the location of the address
book entry, the selected sound will be
heard.

Touch the “With Sound” tab on the
“Address Book Entry Icon” screen.

Touch the desired sound icon.

 The next screen appears when “Bell
(with Direction)” is touched.

103

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Touch to edit the address
book entry name. The
name can be displayed on
the map.

■TO CHANGE “Icon”

3. ADDRESS BOOK

Touch either
or
to adjust the
direction. Then touch “OK”.

■DISPLAYING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRY NAMES

Touch “On” to display the name on the
map and touch “Off” to not display it.

INFORMATION

● The bell sounds only when the vehicle
approaches this point in the direction
that has been set.

■TO CHANGE “Location”

Touch “Edit”.

Touch one of the 8 directional screen

■TO CHANGE “Name”

Touch “Edit”.

buttons to move the cursor
desired point on the map.
Enter the name using the alphanumeric keys.

3
 Up to 70 characters can be entered.

to the

Touch “OK”.

 The previous screen will be displayed.

Touch “OK”.

 The previous screen will be displayed.

104

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

3. ADDRESS BOOK

■TO CHANGE “Phone #”
(PHONE NUMBER)

Touch “Edit”.

Enter the number using the number
keys.

Screen button

Function

“Select All”

Touch to select all registered addresses.

“Unselect All”

Touch to cancel the
“Select All” function.

Touch “Delete”.
Touch “Yes” to delete the address
book entries and touch “No” to cancel
the deletion.

Touch “OK”.

 The previous screen will be displayed.

DELETING ADDRESS BOOK
ENTRIES

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.
Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.

Touch “Address Book” on the “Navigation Settings” screen.

Touch “Delete”.

105

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

6
7

Touch the address to be deleted.

3. ADDRESS BOOK

REGISTERING AREAS TO
AVOID

SETTING UP THE “Areas to
Avoid”
Areas to be avoided because of traffic
jams, construction work or other reasons can be registered as areas to
avoid.

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Areas to Avoid”.

Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.

Touch the desired screen button.

No.

Function

Page

Registering areas to avoid

106

Editing areas to avoid

107

Deleting areas to avoid

110

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Areas to Avoid” on the “Navigation Settings” screen.

Touch “New”.

Touch the desired screen button and
enter the location in the same way as
for a destination search, or display the
map of the area to be avoided. (See
“DESTINATION SEARCH” on page
56.)

Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.

106

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

3. ADDRESS BOOK

Scroll the map to the desired point.

EDITING AREA TO AVOID
The name, location and/or area size of
a registered area can be edited.

“Adjust Location”: Touch to adjust the
position in smaller increments.

7
8

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Areas to Avoid” on the “Navigation Settings” screen.

Touch “Edit”.

Touch the area to be avoided.

Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.

Touch either
or
to change
the size of the area to be avoided.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Touch “Enter”.

1
2

Touch “OK”.

 When registration of an area to avoid is
completed, the “Area to Avoid” screen will
be displayed.
INFORMATION

● If a destination is input in the area to
avoid or the route calculation cannot be
made without running through the area
to avoid, a route passing through the
area to be avoided may be shown.
● Up to 10 locations can be registered as
points/areas to avoid.

107

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

3. ADDRESS BOOK

Touch “Edit” next to the item to be edited.

No.

Function

Page

Touch to edit the name of
the area to avoid. The
name can be displayed on
the map.

108

Touch to edit area location.

109

Touch to edit area size.

109

“Show Name on Map”: The name of an
area to be avoided can be set to be displayed on the map by touching “On” or
“Off”. (See page 108.)
“Active”: The area to avoid feature can be
set to “On” or “Off”.

Touch “OK”.

■TO CHANGE “Name”

Touch “Edit”.

Enter the name using the alphanumeric keys.

 Up to 70 characters can be entered.

Touch “OK”.

 The previous screen will be displayed.

■DISPLAYING NAMES OF AREAS
TO BE AVOIDED

Touch “On”, next to “Show Name on
Map”, to display the name of an area to
be avoided on the map. Touch “Off”
not to display it.

108

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

3. ADDRESS BOOK

■TO CHANGE “Size”

Touch “Edit”.

Touch one of the 8 directional screen

Touch either
or
to change
the size of the area to be avoided.

Touch “OK”.

buttons to move the cursor
desired point on the map.

to the

Touch “OK”.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

■TO CHANGE “Location”

 The previous screen will be displayed.

109

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

3. ADDRESS BOOK

DELETING AREAS TO AVOID

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Areas to Avoid” on the “Navigation Settings” screen.

Touch “Delete”.

Touch the area to be deleted.

Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.

Screen button

Function

“Select All”

Touch to select all registered areas to avoid.

“Unselect All”

Touch to cancel the
“Select All” function.

6
7

DELETING PREVIOUS
DESTINATIONS
Previous destinations can be deleted.

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Delete Previous Dest.”.

Touch the previous destination to be
deleted.

Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.

Touch “Delete”.
Touch “Yes” to delete the area(s) and
touch “No” to cancel the deletion.

110

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

3. ADDRESS BOOK

5
6

Screen button

Function

“Select All”

Touch to select all previous destinations.

“Unselect All”

Touch to cancel the
“Select All” function.

Touch “Delete”.
Touch “Yes” to delete the destination(s) and touch “No” to cancel the
deletion.
3

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
111

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

4. SETUP

1. DETAILED NAVIGATION SETTINGS
Settings are available for driving
speeds, favorite POI categories, automatic screen change, “ Off” function, etc.

Touch the items to be set.

Touch “Save”.

Press the “SETUP” button.

SCREENS FOR NAVIGATION
SETTINGS

Touch “Navigation”.

Touch “Detailed Navi. Settings”.

 On this screen, the following functions can
be performed:

112

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

4. SETUP

No.

Function

No.

Touch to set the average cruising
speed. (See “DRIVING SPEEDS”
on page 113.)

Touch to adjust the current position
mark manually. Miscalculation of the
distance caused by tire replacement
can also be adjusted. (See “CURRENT POSITION/TIRE CHANGE
CALIBRATION” on page 117.)

Touch to set the automatic input
function to “On” or “Off”.
Touch to set the voice guidance for
the next street name to “On” or
“Off” during route guidance.

Touch to set the indication of freely
flowing traffic by the arrow to “On”
or “Off”. (See “SHOW FREE
FLOWING TRAFFIC” on page 115.)
Touch to set displayed POI icon categories. (See “POI CATEGORY
CHANGE (SELECT POI ICONS)”
on page 115.)
Touch to set screen buttons to be
displayed on the map screen when
“ Off”
is
selected.
(See
“SCREEN LAYOUT FUNCTION
(“ Off” Function)” on page 116.)

Touch to set the display of pop-up
information to “On” or “Off”. (See
“POP-UP INFORMATION” on page
118.)
Touch to set IPD road guidance to
“On” or “Off”. (For information on
IPD roads, see page 83.)

 To reset all setup items, touch “Default”.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Touch to set the automatic reroute
of the guidance route to avoid heavy
congestion to “On” or “Off”. (See
“AUTO AVOID TRAFFIC” on page
114.)

Function

DRIVING SPEEDS
The speed that is used for the calculation of the estimated travel time and
estimated arrival time can be set.

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Detailed Navi. Settings” on
the “Navigation Settings” screen.

Touch “Driving Speeds”.

Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.

113

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

4. SETUP

Touch “ ” or “ ” to set the average
vehicle speeds for “Residential”, “Main
Streets” and “Freeways”.

 To set the default speeds, touch
“Default”.
 To use settings based on traffic information, touch “Consider Traffic Info.”.

AUTO AVOID TRAFFIC
The guidance route automatically
changes to another route to avoid
heavy congestion when “Avoid Traffic” is turned on.

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Detailed Navi. Settings” on
the “Navigation Settings” screen.

Touch “Avoid Traffic”.

5
6

Touch “On” or “Off”.

Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.

After setting of the desired speeds is
completed, touch “Save”.
INFORMATION

● The displayed time to the destination is
the approximate driving time that is calculated based on the selected speeds
and the actual position along the guidance route.
● The time shown on the screen may vary
greatly depending on progress along the
route, which may be affected by conditions such as traffic jams and construction work.
● Up to 99 hours 59 minutes can be displayed.

Touch “Save”.

 When congestion information about the
guidance route has been received, a
screen will appear to ask if it is desirable
to reroute to avoid the congestion.
 Touch “Yes” to reroute. Another route to
avoid the congestion will appear.
 Touch “No” if it is not desirable to reroute.
INFORMATION

● When the “Traffic Information” indicator is dimmed, “Avoid Traffic”, “Traffic
Incident Warning” and “Show Free Flowing Traffic” will not operate. (See page
299.)

114

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

4. SETUP

SHOW FREE FLOWING
TRAFFIC
Free flowing traffic can be shown by an
arrow when “Show Free Flowing
Traffic” is turned on.

1
2
3

Press the “SETUP” button.
Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
Touch “Detailed Navi. Settings” on
the “Navigation Settings” screen.
Touch “Show Free Flowing Traffic”.

5
6

Touch “On” or “Off”.

Select up to 6 POI icons to be displayed on the map screen.

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Detailed Navi. Settings” on
the “Navigation Settings” screen.

Touch “Favorite POI Categories”.

Touch the category to be changed.

Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.

Touch “Save”.
INFORMATION

● When the “Traffic Information” indicator is dimmed, “Avoid Traffic”, “Traffic
Incident Warning” and “Show Free Flowing Traffic” will not operate. (See page
299.)

115

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

POI CATEGORY CHANGE
(SELECT POI ICONS)

16:15

4. SETUP

Touch the desired group.

SCREEN LAYOUT FUNCTION
(“ Off” Function)
Each screen button and current street
name on the map screen can be displayed or hidden.

 If the desired POI category is not on the
screen, touch “List All Categories” to list
all POI categories.

Touch the desired category.

 The screen returns to the “Favorite POI
Categories” screen.

Touch “OK”.

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Detailed Navi. Settings” on
the “Navigation Settings” screen.

Touch ““ Off” Function”.

Touch the screen buttons to be turned
off. The selected screen buttons will be
dimmed.

Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.

 To set the setting as a default, touch
“Default”.

Touch “OK”.

 The previous screen will be displayed.

Touch “Save”.

116

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

4. SETUP

CURRENT POSITION/TIRE
CHANGE CALIBRATION
The current position mark can be adjusted manually. Miscalculation of the
distance caused by tire replacement
can also be adjusted.

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.
Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
Touch “Detailed Navi. Settings” on
the “Navigation Settings” screen.

Touch “Calibration”.

TION

CALIBRA-

When driving, the current position
mark will be automatically corrected by
GPS signals. If GPS reception is poor
due to location, the current position
mark can be adjusted manually.

Touch “Position / Direction”.

Touch one of the 8 directional screen
buttons to move the cursor
desired point on the map.

to the

Touch the desired screen button.

Touch “OK”.

 For additional information on the accuracy of a current position, see “LIMITATIONS
OF
THE
NAVIGATION
SYSTEM” on page 126.

117

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

■POSITION/DIRECTION

4. SETUP

Touch either
or
to adjust the
direction of the current position mark.

INFORMATION

● If this procedure is not performed when
the tires are replaced, the current position mark may be incorrectly displayed.

POP-UP INFORMATION

Touch “OK”.

When “Pop-up information” is turned
on, pop-up information will be displayed.

 The map will be displayed.

Press the “SETUP” button.

■TIRE CHANGE CALIBRATION

Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.

Touch “Detailed Navi. Settings” on
the “Navigation Settings” screen.

Touch “Pop-up Information”.

5
6

Touch “On” or “Off”.

The tire change calibration function will
be used when replacing the tires. This
function will adjust miscalculation
caused by the circumference difference between the old and new tires.

To perform the distance calibration
procedure, touch “Tire Change”.

 The message appears and the quick distance calibration is automatically started.
A few seconds later, a map will be displayed.

Touch “Save”.

 When “Pop-up Information” is turned
off, the following messages will not be displayed.

118

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

4. SETUP

This message appears when the map
scale is over 0.5 miles (800 m).

This message appears when the map is
switched to dual map screen mode.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
119

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

4. SETUP

2. VEHICLE SETTINGS
MAINTENANCE

Touch the desired screen button.

When the navigation system is turned
on, the “Maintenance Reminder”
screen displays when it is time to replace a part or certain components.
(See page 26.)

Press the “SETUP” button.

 Setting maintenance information. (See
page 120.)
 Setting dealer. (See page 122.)

MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
SETTING

Touch “Vehicle”.

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Maintenance” on the “Vehicle
Settings” screen.

Touch the desired screen button.

Touch “Vehicle”
screen.

the

“Setup”

Touch “Maintenance”.
 When the vehicle needs to be serviced,
the screen button color will change to
orange.

120

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

4. SETUP

Screen button
“Engine oil”

Function

Replace engine oil filter

“Rotation”

Rotate tires

“Battery”
“Brake pad”

“Set Dealer”

Touch to register dealer
information. (See “DEALER SETTING” on page
122.)

Replace tires

“Dealer Info.”

Touch to edit dealer information. (See “DEALER
SETTING” on page 122.)

“Reminder”

When this screen button
is touched, the indicator
is illuminated. The system is set to give maintenance information with
the “Maintenance Reminder” screen. (See
page 26.)

Replace 12-volt battery
Replace brake pads

“Wipers”

Replace wiper blades

“Coolant”

Replace coolant

“Brake oil”

Replace brake fluid

“Trans. fluid”

Replace transmission fluid

“Service”

Scheduled maintenance

“Air filter”

Replace air filter

“Personal”

New information items
can be created separately from provided ones.

“Delete All”

Touch to cancel all conditions which have been input.

“Reset All”

Touch to reset the item
which has satisfied a condition.

Input the conditions.

121

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Function

Replace engine oil

“Oil filter”

“Tires”

Screen button

4. SETUP

No.

DEALER SETTING

Function
Touch to input the next maintenance
date.
Touch to input the driving distance
until the next maintenance check.
Touch to cancel the date and distance conditions.
Touch to reset the date and distance
conditions.

Touch “OK”.

 The screen then returns
“Maintenance” screen.

the

Dealer information can be registered in
the system. With dealer information
registered, route guidance to the dealer is available.

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Maintenance” on the “Vehicle
Settings” screen.

Touch “Set Dealer”.

If a dealer has not been registered, enter the location of a dealer in the same
way as for a destination search. (See
“DESTINATION SEARCH” on page
56.)

Touch “Vehicle”
screen.

the

“Setup”

INFORMATION

● For scheduled maintenance information,
refer to “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”
or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
● Depending on driving or road conditions,
the actual date and distance maintenance should be performed may differ
from the stored date and distance in the
system.

 When “Set Dealer” registration is finished,
the “Dealer” screen is displayed.

122

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

4. SETUP

Touch “Edit” next to the item to be edited.

No.

Function
Touch to enter the name of a dealer.
(See page 123.)

■TO EDIT “Dealer” OR “Contact”

Touch “Edit” next to “Dealer” or “Contact”.

Enter the name using the alphanumeric keys.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Touch to enter the name of a dealer
member. (See page 123.)
Touch to set the location. (See page
124.)
Touch to enter the phone number.
(See page 124.)
Touch to delete the dealer information displayed on the screen.
Touch to set the displayed dealer as
a destination. (See “STARTING
ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 74.)

 Up to 70 characters can be entered for
dealer and 24 characters for contact.

Touch “OK”.

 The previous screen will be displayed.

123

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

4. SETUP

■TO EDIT “Location”

Touch “Edit” next to “Location”.

Touch one of the 8 directional screen
buttons to move the cursor
to the
desired point on the map screen.

Touch “OK”.

■TO EDIT “Phone #”
(PHONE NUMBER)

Touch “Edit” next to “Phone #”.

Enter the number using number keys.

Touch “OK”.

 The previous screen will be displayed.

124

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

4. SETUP

VEHICLE CUSTOMIZATION
Vehicle settings can be changed.

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Vehicle Customization”.

Touch “Vehicle”
screen.

the

“Setup”

CAUTION
● When performing the customization procedure, ensure that there is sufficient
ventilation in the vehicle and surrounding area. If there is insufficient ventilation, exhaust gases may collect and
enter the vehicle. Exhaust gases include
harmful carbon monoxide (CO) and
inhaling them may lead to death or a
serious health hazard.
INFORMATION

Touch the desired items to be set.

 For a list of the settings that can be
changed, refer to “Owner’s Manual”.

After changing the settings, touch
“Save”. A message indicating that the
settings are being saved will appear.
Do not perform any other operations
while this message is displayed.

125

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

● To avoid discharging the 12-volt battery,
perform the customization procedure
with the hybrid system operating.

5. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)

1. LIMITATIONS OF THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM
This navigation system calculates the
current position using satellite signals,
various vehicle signals, map data, etc.
However, an accurate position may not
be shown depending on satellite conditions, road configuration, vehicle condition or other circumstances.
The Global Positioning System (GPS) developed and operated by the U.S. Department of Defense provides an accurate
current position, normally using 4 or more
satellites, and in some case 3 satellites.
The GPS system has a certain level of inaccuracy. While the navigation system will
compensate for this most of the time, occasional positioning errors of up to 300 ft.
(100 m) can and should be expected. Generally, position errors will be corrected
within a few seconds.

When the vehicle is receiving signals from
satellites, the “GPS” mark appears at the
top left of the screen.
The GPS signal may be physically obstructed, leading to inaccurate vehicle position on the map screen. Tunnels, tall
buildings, trucks, or even the placement of
objects on the instrument panel may obstruct the GPS signals.
The GPS satellites may not send signals
due to repairs or improvements being
made to them.
Even when the navigation system is receiving clear GPS signals, the vehicle position may not be shown accurately or
inappropriate route guidance may occur in
some cases.

NOTICE
● The installation of window tinting may
obstruct the GPS signals. Most window
tinting contains some metallic content
that will interfere with GPS signal reception of the antenna in the instrument
panel. We advise against the use of window tinting on vehicles equipped with
navigation systems.

126

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

5. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)

 If the vehicle cannot receive GPS signals, the current position can be
adjusted manually. For information on
setting the current position calibration,
see page 117.

 Inappropriate route guidance may occur in
the following cases:
• When turning at an intersection off the
designated route guidance.
• If you set more than 1 destination but
skip any of them, auto reroute will display a route returning to the destination
on the previous route.
• When turning at an intersection for which
there is no route guidance.
• When passing through an intersection
for which there is no route guidance.
• During auto reroute, the route guidance
may not be available for the next turn to
the right or left.
• During high speed driving, it may take a
long time for auto reroute to operate. In
auto reroute, a detour route may be
shown.
• After auto reroute, the route may not be
changed.
• If an unnecessary U-turn is shown or
announced.
• If a location has multiple names and the
system announces 1 or more of them.
• When a route cannot be searched.
• If the route to your destination includes
gravel, unpaved roads or alleys, the
route guidance may not be shown.
• Your destination point might be shown
on the opposite side of the street.
• When a portion of the route has regulations prohibiting the entry of the vehicle
that vary by time or season or other reasons.
• The road and map data stored in the
navigation system may not be complete
or may not be the latest version.
 After replacing a tire, implement the
operation described in “TIRE CHANGE
CALIBRATION”. (See page 118.)

127

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

 Accurate current position may not be
shown in the following cases:
• When driving on a small angled Yshaped road.
• When driving on a winding road.
• When driving on a slippery road such as
in sand, gravel, snow, etc.
• When driving on a long straight road.
• When freeway and surface streets run in
parallel.
• After moving by ferry or vehicle carrier.
• When a long route is searched during
high speed driving.
• When driving without setting the current
position calibration correctly.
• After repeating a change of direction by
going forward and backward, or turning
on a turntable in a parking lot.
• When leaving a covered parking lot or
parking garage.
• When a roof carrier is installed.
• When driving with tire chains installed.
• When the tires are worn.
• After replacing a tire or tires.
• When using tires that are smaller or
larger than the factory specifications.
• When the tire pressure in any of the 4
tires is not correct.

5. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)

INFORMATION

● This navigation system uses tire turning
data and is designed to work with factory-specified tires for the vehicle.
Installing tires that are larger or smaller
than the originally equipped diameter
may cause inaccurate display of the current position. The tire pressure also
affects the diameter of the tires, so make
sure that the tire pressure of all 4 tires is
correct.

128

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

4
PHONE
1

5. RECEIVE ON THE Bluetooth®
PHONE ...................................... 148

PHONE OPERATION

1. QUICK REFERENCE................... 130
2. PHONE (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM
FOR CELLULAR PHONE) ........ 132

6. TALK ON THE Bluetooth®
PHONE ...................................... 149
WHEN YOU SELECT “0-9”.................. 149
INCOMING CALL WAITING ................ 151

USING THE PHONE SWITCH ............ 133
USING THE STEERING
SWITCHES ....................................... 134
ABOUT THE PHONEBOOK
IN THIS SYSTEM.............................. 134

7. Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE
FUNCTION ................................ 152
CHECKING MESSAGES ..................... 152

NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION ....... 154

1. PHONE SETTINGS ..................... 155

RECONNECTING THE Bluetooth®
PHONE ............................................. 140

PHONEBOOK...................................... 157

4. CALL ON THE Bluetooth
PHONE....................................... 141

SETUP

CONNECTING A Bluetooth
PHONE ............................................. 138

REPLYING (QUICK REPLY) ............... 153

WHEN SELLING OR DISPOSING
OF THE VEHICLE............................. 135

3. REGISTER A Bluetooth®
PHONE....................................... 137

PHONE SOUND SETTINGS ............... 155
MESSAGE SETTINGS ........................ 170

PHONE DISPLAY SETTINGS ............. 174

BY DIAL............................................... 141

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS ............... 177

BY PHONEBOOK................................ 141

REGISTERED DEVICES ..................... 177

BY SPEED DIAL.................................. 143

SELECTING A Bluetooth® PHONE ..... 181

BY CALL HISTORY............................. 143

SELECTING PORTABLE PLAYER ..... 183

BY VOICE RECOGNITION ................. 145

DETAILED Bluetooth® SETTINGS ...... 184

CALLING USING AN
SMS/MMS MESSAGE ...................... 147
BY POI* CALL ..................................... 147

*: Point of Interest
129

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. PHONE OPERATION

1. QUICK REFERENCE
Bluetooth® phones can be operated via the navigation system’s screen. To display
the hands-free operation screen, press the
button or the
switch on the steering wheel.

130

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. PHONE OPERATION

No.

Name

The condition of
Bluetooth®
connection

The receiving
area

The level of
reception

“SETUP” button
button

No connection
Good
An antenna for the Bluetooth® connection is built in the instrument
panel. The condition of the Bluetooth® connection may deteriorate
and the system may not function when a Bluetooth® phone is used
in the following conditions and/or places:
 The cellular phone is obstructed by certain objects (such as when
it is behind the seat or in the glove box and console box).
 The cellular phone touches or is covered with metal materials.
Leave the Bluetooth® phone in a place where the condition of the
Bluetooth® connection is good.
When the cellular phone is not connected, “No Connect” is displayed.

Empty
Full
This is not displayed when the Bluetooth® is not connected.
The amount displayed does not always correspond with the amount
displayed on the cellular phone. The amount of battery charge left
may not be displayed depending on the type of phone you have.
This system does not have a charging function.
“Rm” is displayed when receiving in a roaming area.
The receiving area may not be displayed depending on the type of
phone you have.

Poor
Excellent
The level of reception does not always correspond with the level displayed on the cellular phone. The level of reception may not be displayed depending on the phone you have.
When the cellular phone is out of the service area or in a place inaccessible by radio waves, “No Service” is displayed.
Press to display the “Setup” screen. Touching “Phone” or
“Bluetooth*” on the “Setup” screen displays the hands-free setup
screen.
Press to display the hands-free operation screen.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

131

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

PHONE

The amount of
battery charge
left

Function

1. PHONE OPERATION

2. PHONE (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONE)
The hands-free system enables calls
to be made and received without having to take your hands off the steering
wheel.
This system supports Bluetooth®.
Bluetooth® is a wireless data system
that enables cellular phones to be used
without being connected by a cable or
placed in a cradle.
The operating procedure of the phone
is explained here.
 For registering and setting of the phone,
see “PHONE SETTINGS” on page 155
and “Bluetooth® SETTINGS” on page
177.

CAUTION
● While driving, do not use a cellular
phone or connect the Bluetooth® phone.
● Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth®
antennas. People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should
maintain a reasonable distance between
themselves and the Bluetooth® antennas. The radio waves may affect the
operation of such devices.
● Before using Bluetooth® devices, users
of any electrical medical device other
than
implanted
pacemakers
and
implanted cardiac defibrillators should
consult the manufacturer of the device
for information about its operation under
the influence of radio waves. Radio
waves could have unexpected effects on
the operation of such medical devices.

INFORMATION

● If your cellular phone does not support
Bluetooth®, this system cannot function.
● In the following conditions, the system
may not function:
• The cellular phone is turned off.
• The current position is outside the
communication area.
• The cellular phone is not connected.
• The cellular phone has a low battery.
● When using Bluetooth® audio and
hands-free at the same time, the following problems may occur:
• The Bluetooth® connection may be
cut.
• Noise may be heard on the Bluetooth®
audio playback.
● This system supports the following services:
• Bluetooth® Specification
Ver.1.1 or higher
(Recommended: Ver.2.1 + EDR or
higher)
• Profiles
HFP (Hands Free Profile)
Ver.1.0 or higher
(Recommended: Ver.1.5 or higher)
OPP (Object Push Profile)
Ver.1.1 or higher
PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile)
Ver.1.0 or higher
MAP (Message Access Profile)
Ver.1.0 or higher
SPP (Serial Port Profile)
Ver.1.1 or higher*

*: This profile is necessary when using
Entune. (See “ENTUNE SERVICE” on
page 304.)

NOTICE
● Do not leave your cellular phone in the
vehicle. The temperature inside may rise
to a level that could damage the phone.

132

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. PHONE OPERATION

INFORMATION

● If your cellular phone does not support
HFP, registering the Bluetooth® phone
or using OPP, PBAP, MAP or SPP profiles individually will not be possible.
● If the connected Bluetooth® phone version is older than recommended or
incompatible, this function may not be
used.
● Refer
to
http://www.Toyota.com/
Bluetooth/ to find approved Bluetooth®
phones for this system.

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

USING THE PHONE SWITCH
By pressing the phone switch, a call
can be received or ended without taking your hands off the steering wheel.

 The microphone can be used when talking
on the phone.

PHONE

Type A

Type B

133

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. PHONE OPERATION

INFORMATION

● The other party’s voice will be heard
from the front speakers. The audio/video
system will be muted during phone calls
or when hands-free voice commands
are used.
● Talk alternately with the other party on
the phone. If both parties speak at the
same time, the other party may not hear
what has been said. (This is not a malfunction.)
● Keep call volume down. Otherwise, the
other party’s voice may be audible outside the vehicle and voice echo may
increase. When talking on the phone,
speak clearly towards the microphone.
● The other party may not hear you clearly
when:
• Driving on an unpaved road. (Making
excessive traffic noise.)
• Driving at high speeds.
• The roof or windows are open.
• The air conditioning vents are pointed
towards the microphone.
• The sound of the air-conditioning fan is
loud.
• There is a negative effect on sound
quality due to the phone and/or network being used.

USING THE STEERING
SWITCHES

Volume control switch
 Press the “+” side to increase the volume.
 Press the “-” side to decrease the volume.

ABOUT THE PHONEBOOK IN
THIS SYSTEM
 The following data is stored for every registered phone. When another phone is
connected, the following registered data
cannot be read:
• Phonebook data
• Call history data
• Speed dial data
• Image data
• All phone settings
• Message settings
INFORMATION

● When a phone’s registration is deleted,
the above-mentioned data is also
deleted.

134

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. PHONE OPERATION

WHEN SELLING OR
DISPOSING OF THE VEHICLE
A lot of personal data is registered
when the hands-free system is used.
When selling or disposing of the vehicle, initialize the data. (See “DELETING PERSONAL DATA” on page 51.)
 The following data in the system can be
initialized:
• Phonebook data
• Call history data
• Speed dial data
• Image data
• All phone settings
• Message settings
INFORMATION

 FCC ID : HYQDNNS059
Type : DNNS059
IC : 1551A-DNNS059 Canada 310
 This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any
interference
received,
including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.

CAUTION
● FCC
WARNING:
Changes
or
modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
● CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation
Exposure
This equipment complies with FCC
radiation exposure limits set forth for
uncontrolled environment and meets the
FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure
Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.
This equipment has very low levels of
RF energy that it deemed to comply
without maximum permissive exposure
evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that
it should be installed and operated with
at least 20 cm and more between the
radiator and person’s body (excluding
extremities: hands, wrists, feet and
ankles).
● Co-location: This transmitter must not be
co-located or operated in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter.

135

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

PHONE

● Once initialized, the data and settings
will be erased. Pay much attention when
initializing the data.

U.S.A.

1. PHONE OPERATION

Canada

CAUTION
● NOTE
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions; (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée
seulement
aux
deux
conditions
suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif
doit être prêt à accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique reçu, même si ce
brouillage
est
susceptible
de
compromettre le fonctionnement du
dispositif.
● This equipment complies with IC
radiation exposure limits set forth for
uncontrolled environment and meets
RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure rules. This equipment has
very low levels of RF energy that it
deemed to comply without maximum
permissive exposure evaluation (MPE).
But it is desirable that it should be
installed and operated with at least 20
cm and more between the radiator and
person’s body (excluding extremities:
hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
Cet équipement se conforme aux limites
d’exposition aux radiations établies par
Industrie
Canada
pour
un
environnement non contrôlé ainsi qu’aux
directives d’exposition aux fréquences
radioélectriques (RF) émises par
Industrie Canada dans la norme
CNR-102. Cet équipement émet un
niveau d’énergie RF faible à un point tel
qu’il se conforme sans devoir effectuer
d’évaluation d’exposition maximum
admissible (MPE). Lorsque l’équipement
est utilisé, il est toutefois souhaitable de
laisser au moins 20 cm entre l’antenne
et le corps (à l’exception des
extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et
chevilles).

CAUTION
● Co-location: This transmitter must not be
co-located or operated in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter.
Co-implantation: cet émetteur ne doit
pas être co-implanté ou actionné en
même temps qu’aucune autre antenne
ou émetteur.

136

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. PHONE OPERATION

3. REGISTER A Bluetooth® PHONE
To use the hands-free system, it is
necessary to register a phone with the
system. Once the phone has been registered, it is possible to make a handsfree call.
If a Bluetooth® phone has not been
registered yet, it is necessary to register it first according to the following procedure. A Bluetooth® phone cannot be
registered while driving.
 See “REGISTERING A Bluetooth®
DEVICE” on page 178 of additional registration when registering.

switch

Touch “Yes” to register a phone.

the Bluetooth® device.

 Search for the navigation system displayed on the system’s screen using your
Bluetooth® device, and register the
Bluetooth® device.
For details about operating the Bluetooth®
device, see the manual that comes with it.
 A passcode is not required for SSP
(Secure Simple Pairing) compatible
Bluetooth® phones. Depending on the
type of Bluetooth® phone being
connected,
a
message
confirming
registration may be displayed on the
Bluetooth® phone’s screen. Respond and
operate the Bluetooth® phone according
to the confirmation message.
 To cancel the registration, touch
“Cancel”.
 If the Bluetooth® phone to be registered
has a Bluetooth® audio function, this can
be registered at the same time.

 If 5 Bluetooth® devices have already been
registered, a registered device needs to
be deleted. See “When 5 Bluetooth®
devices have already been registered” on
page 138.

When this screen is displayed, operate

This screen will be displayed when
registration is complete.

 When using the same phone, it is not necessary to register it again.

137

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

PHONE

Press the
button or the
on the steering wheel.

1. PHONE OPERATION

When this screen is displayed, follow the
guidance on the screen to try again.

If the Bluetooth® phone
Bluetooth® audio function

When another Bluetooth® device is connected

 When the Bluetooth® phone to be registered has a Bluetooth® audio function, this
audio function will be registered automatically at the same time and this screen may
be displayed. If this screen is displayed,
touch “Yes” to connect the audio function
or touch “No” to cancel the connection.

has

CONNECTING A Bluetooth®
PHONE
 When another Bluetooth® device is currently connected, this screen is displayed.
 To disconnect the Bluetooth® device,
touch “Yes”.

When 5 Bluetooth® devices have already been registered

When 5 Bluetooth® devices have already been registered, a registered device needs to be deleted. Touch “Yes”
to delete 1 or more.

Touch the device to be deleted, then
touch “Remove”.

Touch “Yes”.

AUTOMATICALLY
When a phone is registered, auto connection is turned on. Always set it to
this mode and leave the Bluetooth®
phone in a location where connection
can be established.

 For automatic connection, see “CHANGING “Bluetooth* Power”” on page 185.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

138

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. PHONE OPERATION

MANUALLY
When the auto connection has failed or
“Bluetooth* Power” is turned off, it is
necessary to connect Bluetooth® manually.
 When the “POWER” switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode, the system searches
for a nearby registered cellular phone.
 The system will connect with the phone
that was last connected, if it is nearby.
When “Display Phone Status” is set to
“On”, the connection status is displayed.
(See “Bluetooth® DEVICE CONNECTION STATUS DISPLAY SETTINGS” on
page 187.)

Press the
button or the
on the steering wheel.

Touch “Connect Phone”.

switch

Touch the screen button corresponding to the desired phone connection.

INFORMATION

● It may take time if the phone connection
is carried out during Bluetooth® device
playback.
Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on
the phone.
 When the cellular phone’s device name
has not been able to be obtained, “Device
1” to “Device 5” will be displayed in the
order the phones were registered.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

139

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

PHONE

 This screen appears when the Bluetooth®
phone is first connected after the
“POWER” switch is in ACCESSORY or
ON mode.

1. PHONE OPERATION

This screen is displayed.

When the connection is completed,
this screen is displayed.

RECONNECTING THE
Bluetooth® PHONE
If a Bluetooth® phone is disconnected
due to poor reception from the
Bluetooth®
network
when
the
“POWER” switch is in ACCESSORY or
ON mode, the system automatically
reconnects the Bluetooth® phone.
When “Display Phone Status” is set
to “On”, the connection status is
displayed.
 If a Bluetooth® phone is disconnected on
purpose, such as turning it off, this does
not happen. Reconnect the Bluetooth®
phone manually.

 Now you can use the Bluetooth® phone.

When a phone is connected while
Bluetooth® audio is playing

 This screen is displayed, and the
Bluetooth® audio will stop temporarily.

140

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. PHONE OPERATION

4. CALL ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE
After a Bluetooth® phone has been
registered, a call can be made using
the hands-free system. There are 7
methods by which a call can be made.
These are described below.

BY DIAL
A call can be made by inputting the
phone number.
This cannot be operated while driving.

Press the
button or the
on the steering wheel.

Touch the desired key to input the
phone number.

switch

BY PHONEBOOK
Calls can be made by using the phonebook data which is transferred from the
registered cellular phone.
The phonebook changes depending
on the phone connected. Up to 1000
contacts (maximum of 3 numbers per
contact) can be registered in each
phonebook.
This cannot be operated while driving.

Touch “Contacts”.
4

PHONE

 Each time
is deleted.

Touch the desired data from the list.

is touched, an input digit

Touch
or press the
on the steering wheel.

switch

 Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the
phone.

141

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. PHONE OPERATION

Touch the desired number from the list.

Touch
or press the
on the steering wheel.

switch

PBAP compatible models

PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible
models

WHEN THE PHONEBOOK IS
EMPTY

Touch “Contacts”.

Transfer the phonebook data to the
system using the Bluetooth® phone.

 Depending on the type of cellular phone,
OBEX authentication may be required
when transferring phonebook data. Enter
“1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.

Touch “Yes” or “Transfer” to automatically transfer the phonebook from
the connected phone.

 Touch “Manual” to transfer the phonebook manually. (See “TRANSFERRING A
PHONE NUMBER” on page 158.)
 Touch “No” or “Cancel” to cancel transferring.
 If your cellular phone is neither PBAP nor
OPP compatible, the phonebook cannot
be transferred.

 This screen appears while transferring. To
cancel this function, touch “Cancel”.

142

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. PHONE OPERATION

INFORMATION

Touch the desired number to call.

● Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone:
• It may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone when transferring phonebook data.
• The registered image on the phonebook may not appear when phonebook
data is transferred.

When the data transfer from a PBAP
incompatible but OPP compatible
model is complete, “Done” will appear
on the screen. Touch “Done”.

 The list to be displayed can be changed
by touching the “Speed Dial 1”, “Speed
Dial 2” or “Speed Dial 3” tab.

BY CALL HISTORY

All: all calls (missed, incoming or outgoing)

BY SPEED DIAL
Calls can be made using registered
phone numbers which can be selected
from a phonebook. (See “REGISTERING THE SPEED DIAL” on page 166
for registering the speed dial.)

Up to 25 call history items can be selected from the “All” tab while driving.
Missed: calls that were missed
Incoming: calls that were received
Outgoing: calls that were made

This can be operated while driving.

Touch “Speed Dials”.

143

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

PHONE

CALLS CAN BE MADE BY
CALL HISTORY WHICH HAS 4
FUNCTIONS

1. PHONE OPERATION

Touch “Call History”.

CALLS CAN BE MADE USING
THE LATEST CALL HISTORY
ITEM
Press the
button or the
switch
on the steering wheel to display the
“Phone” screen.

Press the
switch on the steering
wheel to display the “Call History”
screen.

Press the
switch on the steering
wheel to select the latest history item.

Touch
or press the
switch
on the steering wheel to call the latest
history item.

Touch the desired data from the list.

 The list to be displayed can be changed
by touching the “All”, “Missed”, “Incoming” or “Outgoing” tab.

Touch
or press the
on the steering wheel.

switch

 When making a call by phonebook, the
name (if registered) is displayed.
 When making a call to the same number
continuously, only the most recent call is
listed in call history.
 When a phone number registered in the
phonebook is received, the name and the
number are displayed.
 Number-withheld calls are also memorized in the system.
 International phone calls may not be made
depending on the type of cellular phone
you have.

144

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. PHONE OPERATION

BY VOICE RECOGNITION
Calls can be made by giving a voice
command. (For the operation and
command of voice recognition, see
“VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM” on
page 268.)
This can be operated while driving.

Say the name, or the name and type of
phone, of a registered contact.

 In the same manner as it is displayed on
the screen, “Call ”, after
saying “Call” say the name, or the name
and type of phone, of a contact.
For example: “Call”, “John Smith” or
“Call”, “Mary Davis”, “Mobile”
 There are 4 types of phones: Home,
Mobile, Office and Other.
 Short or abbreviated names in the phonebook may not be recognized. Change
names in the phonebook to full names.
 Sometimes a voice recognition result confirmation screen will be displayed. After
confirming the result, say “Yes” or “No”.
 When the system recognizes multiple
names from the phonebook, a name candidate list will be displayed on the screen.
If the desired name is not displayed on the
top of the screen, say the number of the
name from the candidate list (number 1
and number 2) to select a name from the
candidate list.
 When a contact has multiple phone numbers registered in the phonebook, a candidate list will be displayed. If the desired
phone number is not displayed on the top
of the screen, say the number of the
desired phone number from the candidate
list (number 1 and number 2) to select a
phone number from the candidate list.

Say “Dial” to call the phone number.

Press the talk switch.

 “Call ” is displayed in the
“Shortcut Menu” screen.
 When “Call ” on the
“Shortcut Menu” screen is dimmed, the
phonebook’s voice command recognition
cannot be used. Check the Bluetooth®
connection and if the contacts have been
transferred to the navigation system.

145

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

PHONE

VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE:
CALL NAME

1. PHONE OPERATION

VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE:
DIAL NUMBER

Press the talk switch.

 “Dial ” is displayed in the “Shortcut Menu” screen.
 When “Dial ” on the “Shortcut
Menu” screen is dimmed, the phone number voice recognition cannot be used.
Check the Bluetooth® phone connection.

Say the phone number.

 In the same manner as it is displayed on
the screen, “Dial ”, after saying
“Dial” say the phone number.
 Say the phone number one digit at a time.
For example, if the phone number is
2345678:
Say “two three four five six seven
eight”
Do not say “twenty three forty five sixty
seven eight”
 The system can recognize the following
types of phone numbers:
3 digit numbers (911, 411, 611)
7 digit numbers (Local phone numbers)
10 digit numbers (Area code + Local
phone number)
11 digit phone numbers (1 + Area code +
Local phone number)
 As the system cannot recognize additional
numbers, say the complete number without stopping.
 When the system recognizes multiple
phone numbers, a phone number candidate list will be displayed on the screen. If
the desired phone number is not displayed
on the top of the screen, say the number
of the desired phone number from the
candidate list (number 1 and number 2) to
select a phone number from the candidate
list.

■INTERNATIONAL CALL
To dial a phone number that is not a 3,
7, 10 or 11 digit number, for example
an international number, use “International Call”.

Go to the “Main Menu” screen by
pressing the talk switch on the steering
wheel and saying “Main menu” or
touch “Main Menu”.

2
3

Say “Use a phone”.
Say “International call”.

 Up to 24 digits can be recognized when
using the international call function. The
number can also be divided into multiple
groups and recognized.

Calling without the voice recognition:
After the desired phone number is displayed, a call can also made by pressing
the
switch on the steering wheel.
Canceling the voice recognition: The
voice recognition will be canceled when
either of the following is performed:
• Press and hold the talk switch.
• Touch “Cancel”.

Say “Dial” to call the phone number.

146

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. PHONE OPERATION

CALLING USING AN
SMS/MMS MESSAGE

BY POI CALL

Calls can be made to an SMS (Short
Message Service)/MMS (Multimedia
Messaging Service) message sender’s
phone number.
This can be operated while driving.

Touch “Messages”.

A call can be made by touching
when it is displayed on the screen from
the navigation system. (See “TO SEE
INFORMATION ABOUT THE ICON
WHERE THE CURSOR IS SET” on
page 35 and “VIEW DETAILED FUEL
PRICE INFORMATION” on page 292.)

PHONE

 When “Message Transfer” is set to
“Off”, a confirmation screen will be displayed. Touch “Yes”. (See page 170.)

Touch the “SMS/MMS” tab and then
touch the desired received message
from the list.

 The tab display may vary depending on
the type of cellular phone.

Touch
or press the
on the steering wheel.

switch

147

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. PHONE OPERATION

5. RECEIVE ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE
When a call is received, this screen is
displayed with a sound.

Touch
or press the
switch
on the steering wheel to talk on the
phone.

To refuse to receive the call: Touch
or press the
switch on the
steering wheel.
To adjust the volume of a received
call: Touch “-” or “+”, turn the
“PWR VOL” knob, or use the volume
switch on the steering wheel.
INFORMATION

● During international phone calls, the
other party’s name or number may not
be displayed correctly depending on the
type of cellular phone you have.
● The incoming call display mode can be
set. (See “INCOMING CALL DISPLAY”
on page 175.)

148

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. PHONE OPERATION

6. TALK ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE
While talking on the phone, this screen
is displayed. The operations outlined
below can be performed on this
screen.

To adjust the volume of the other party’s voice: Touch “-” or “+”, turn the
“PWR VOL” knob, or use the volume
switch on the steering wheel.

INFORMATION

● Changing from hands-free call to cellular
phone call is not possible while driving.
● When cellular phone call is changed to
hands-free call, the hands-free screen
will be displayed and its functions can be
operated on the screen.
● Changing between cellular phone call
and hands-free call can be performed by
operating the cellular phone directly.
● Transferring methods and operations
will be different depending on the type of
cellular phone you have.
● For the operation of the cellular phone,
see the manual that comes with it.

PHONE

To hang up the phone: Touch
or press the
switch on the steering
wheel.
To mute your voice: Touch “Mute”.
To input a key: Touch “0-9”.
To transfer the call: Touch “Handset
Mode” to change from hands-free call to
cellular phone call. Touch “Handsfree
Mode” to change from cellular phone
call to hands-free call.

WHEN YOU SELECT “0-9”
INPUTTING A KEY
Inputting a key is not possible while
driving.

Touch the desired number to input the
key.

To hang up the phone: Touch
or press the
wheel.

switch on the steering

149

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. PHONE OPERATION

TONE SIGNAL
If a continuous tone signal is registered
in a phonebook, this screen appears.
(If not registered, “Send” and “Clear”
are not displayed.) This can be operated while driving.

Confirm the number displayed on the
screen and touch “Send”. The number
before marked sign will be sent.

 When “Clear” is touched, this function is
finished and the normal tone screen
appears.

To hang up the phone: Touch
or press the
wheel.

switch on the steering

INFORMATION

● The continuous tone signal is the
marked sign (p or w) and the number
that follows the phone number. (e.g.
056133w0123p#1)
● When the “p” pause tone is used, after
waiting 2 seconds the tone data up until
the next pause tone will be automatically
sent. When the “w” pause tone is used,
the tone data up until the next pause
tone will be automatically sent after user
operation.
● This operation can be done when it is
desirable to operate an answering
machine or use a telephone service in a
bank for example. The phone number
and the code number in the phonebook
can be registered.

BY VOICE RECOGNITION
“Send Tones” can be operated by giving a command during a call.
 The operating procedure is similar to
other voice recognition operations. (For
the operation of voice recognition, see
“VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM” on page
268.)

150

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. PHONE OPERATION

INCOMING CALL WAITING
When a call is interrupted by a third
party while talking, this screen is displayed.

Touch
or press the
switch on the steering wheel to start
talking with the other party.

INFORMATION

● If your cellular phone does not support
HFP Ver. 1.5, this function cannot be
used.
● The ring tone that has been set in the
“Phone Sound Settings” screen sounds
when there is an incoming call. Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone,
both the navigation system and
Bluetooth® phone may sound simultaneously when there is an incoming call.
(See “RING TONE SETTING” on page
156.)

PHONE

 Touch
or press the
switch
on the steering wheel to refuse the call.

 Each time
is touched or the
switch on the steering wheel is pressed
during an interrupted call, the party who
is on hold will be switched.

151

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. PHONE OPERATION

7. Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE FUNCTION
Received messages can be forwarded
from the connected Bluetooth® phone,
enabling checking and replying using
the navigation system (Quick reply).

Messages can be checked.

CHECKING MESSAGES

1
2

Press the
button or the
on the steering wheel.

switch

Touch “Messages”.

 Touching “Previous” or “Next” displays
the previous or next message.
 Only received messages on the connected Bluetooth® phone can be displayed.
 The text of the message is not displayed
while driving.

5
 Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the
phone.
 When “Message Transfer” is set to
“Off”, a confirmation screen will be displayed. Touch “Yes”. (See page 170.)

Touch “Play” to start reading out of the
message. Touch “Stop” to stop the
function.

 Touch “-” or “+”, turn the “PWR VOL”
knob, or use the volume switch on the
steering wheel to adjust the message read
out volume.
 The message read out function is available even while driving.

Touch the screen button corresponding to the desired message.

 Messages are displayed in the appropriate connected Bluetooth® phone’s registered mail address folder. Touch the tab of
the desired folder to be displayed.

152

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. PHONE OPERATION

 When the received message is an email and “Update Message Read Status on Phone” is set to “On”, “Mark
as Unread” or “Mark as Read” can be
selected. Touch “Mark as Unread” to
mark mails that have been read on the
Bluetooth® phone as unread. Conversely, touch “Mark as Read” to mark
mails that have not been read on the
Bluetooth® phone as read. (See “MESSAGE SETTINGS” on page 170.)
 For SMS/MMS, touching

REPLYING (QUICK REPLY)

Touch “Reply”.

Touch the screen button corresponding to the desired message.

pressing the
switch on the steering
wheel calls the sender. (See page 147.)
 Touch “Reply” to reply to the message.
(See page 153.)

PHONE

Touch “Send”.

 While the message is being sent, a sending message screen is displayed.

This screen will be displayed if message delivery fails.

 Touch “Retry” to attempt to send the
message again or touch “Cancel” to cancel.

153

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. PHONE OPERATION

EDITING REPLY MESSAGES

Reply messages can be edited while
the vehicle is parked. Touch “Edit”.

Touch the screen button corresponding to the desired message.

NEW MESSAGE
NOTIFICATION
If “New Message Pop-up” and “New
Message Voice Notification” are set
to “On”, a notification appears on the
screen and a voice notification will be
heard when a new message arrives.
(See “MESSAGE SETTINGS” on page
170.)

Touch “Read” to check the message.

 The “Messages” screen will be displayed.
 When “Automatic Message Readout” is
set to “On”, the message will be automatically read out. (See “MESSAGE SETTINGS” on page 170.)
 For SMS/MMS, touching

Touch “OK” when editing is completed.

Touch

pressing the
switch on the steering
wheel calls the sender. (See page 147.)
 To check the message later, touch
“Ignore” or
.

154

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

1. PHONE SETTINGS
The phonebook can be edited. Volume, display and message settings
can also be changed.

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Phone”.

Perform each setting according to the
procedures outlined on the following
pages.

The call and ring tone volume can be
adjusted. A ring tone can be selected.

Touch “Phone Sound Settings”.

Perform each setting according to the
procedures outlined on the following
pages.

When all settings are completed, touch
“Save”.

PHONE

PHONE SOUND SETTINGS

INFORMATION

● The system will automatically increase
the volume when the speed exceeds 50
mph (80 km/h).

155

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

CALL VOLUME SETTING

RING TONE SETTING

Touch “Call Volume” on the “Phone
Sound Settings” screen.

Touch “Ring Tone” on the “Phone
Sound Settings” screen.

Touch “-” or “+” to adjust the call volume.

Touch the screen button corresponding to the desired ring tone.

Touch “OK”.

 Ring tones can be heard by touching the
screen buttons.

RING TONE VOLUME SETTING

Touch “Ring Tone Volume” on the
“Phone Sound Settings” screen.

Touch “-” or “+” to adjust the ring tone
volume.

Touch “OK”.

INITIALIZING THE SETTINGS
The settings can be initialized.

Touch “Default” on the “Phone Sound
Settings” screen.

Touch “Yes”.

Touch “OK”.

156

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

SETTING THE PHONEBOOK

PHONEBOOK
The call history can be deleted and
phonebook and speed dial settings
can be changed.

1
2
3

Press the “SETUP” button.
Touch “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.
Touch “Phonebook”.

The phonebook can be transferred
from a Bluetooth® phone to the system. The phonebook also can be added, edited and deleted.

1
2
3

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Manage Contacts”.

Touch “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.
Touch “Phonebook” on the “Phone
Settings” screen.

PHONE

Perform each setting according to the
procedures outlined on the following
pages.

INFORMATION

● Phonebook data is managed independently for every registered phone. When
one phone is connected, another
phone’s registered data cannot be read.

157

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

■THE “Contacts” SCREEN CAN
ALSO BE DISPLAYED

Press the
button or the
on the steering wheel.

Touch “Contacts” on the “Phone”
screen.

Touch “Options”.

switch

■TRANSFERRING A PHONE NUMBER

The phone numbers in a Bluetooth®
phone can be transferred to the system. The system can manage up to 5
phonebooks. Up to 1000 contacts
(maximum of 3 numbers per contact)
can be registered in each phonebook.
Operation methods differ between
PBAP compatible and PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth®
phones.

If your cellular phone is neither PBAP
nor OPP compatible, the phonebook
cannot be transferred.
Touch “Manage Contacts”.

For PBAP
phones

compatible

Bluetooth®

Touch “Transfer Contacts”.

Touch “Update Contacts”.

158

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

Transfer the phonebook data to the
®

system using a Bluetooth phone.
 This operation may be unnecessary
depending on a cellular phone model.
 Depending on the type of cellular phone,
OBEX authentication may be required
when transferring phonebook data. Enter
“1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.

 This screen appears while transferring. To
cancel this function, touch “Cancel”.

PBAP compatible models automatic
data transfer setting
When a PBAP compatible phone is connected, the phone’s phonebook data can
be automatically transferred.
Touch “Transfer Contacts”.

Touch “Automatically Download
Contacts” to transfer the phonebook
from a connected cellular phone.
Touch “Automatically Download
Call History” to transfer the call history from a connected cellular phone.

Touch “On”.

Touch “Save”.

 If another Bluetooth® device is connected
when transferring phonebook data,
depending on the phone, the connected
Bluetooth® device may need to be disconnected.

159

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

PHONE

2. SETUP

INFORMATION

● Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone, the registered image on the
phonebook may not appear when
phonebook data is transferred.

For PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth® phones

Transfer the phonebook data to the
system using a Bluetooth® phone.

 Depending on the type of cellular phone,
OBEX authentication may be required
when transferring phonebook data. Enter
“1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.

Touch “Transfer Contacts”.

Touch “Replace Contacts” or “Add
Contacts”.

 This screen appears while transferring. To
cancel this function, touch “Cancel”. If
“Add Contacts” is touched and there is
an interruption during the transfer of data,
the phonebook data transferred until then
will be stored in the system. This is not the
case when “Cancel” is touched.

When the transfer is complete, “Done”
will appear on the screen. Touch
“Done”.

When another Bluetooth® device is connected

 If the phonebook contains phonebook
data, this screen is displayed.

 When another Bluetooth® device is currently connected, this screen is displayed.
 To disconnect it, touch “Yes”.

160

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

■REGISTERING THE PHONEBOOK

From “Contacts” screen

Phonebooks of PBAP incompatible but
OPP compatible phones can also be
transferred from the “Contacts” screen.

Press the
button or the
on the steering wheel.

Touch “Contacts” on the “Phone”
screen.

Touch “Transfer”.

switch

DATA

The phonebook data can be registered.
Up to 3 numbers per person can be
registered. New phonebook data cannot be added for PBAP compatible
Bluetooth® phones.

Touch “New Contact”.

This screen is displayed. The following
operations are performed in the same
manner as when they are performed
from the “Setup” screen.

Use the software keyboard to input the
name and touch “OK”.

Input the phone number and touch
“OK”.

 To use a tone signal after the phone number, input the tone signal too.

161

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

PHONE

2. SETUP

Touch the phone type.

Touch “Edit Contacts”.

When 2 or less numbers in total are
registered to this contact, this screen is
displayed.

Touch the desired data to edit.

Touch the desired name or number.

Edit the name or the number. (See
“REGISTERING THE PHONEBOOK
DATA” on page 161.)

Touch “Save” when editing is completed.

 To add a number to this contact, touch
“Yes”.

■EDITING THE PHONEBOOK DATA
The phone number can be registered
in “Phone # 1”, “Phone # 2” and
“Phone # 3” separately. Phonebooks
cannot be edited for PBAP compatible
Bluetooth® phones via the navigation
system.

162

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

■THE “Edit Contact” SCREEN CAN
ALSO BE DISPLAYED

From the “Contact” screen

From the “Call History” screen

Press the
button or the
on the steering wheel.

switch

Press the
button or the
on the steering wheel.

switch

Touch “Call History” on the “Phone”
screen.

Touch “Contacts” on the “Phone”
screen.

Touch the desired number from the list
on the “Call History” screen.

Touch the desired data from the list on
the “Contacts” screen.

Touch “Add to Contacts” or “Update
Contact”.

Touch “Options”.

Touch “Edit”.

If “Update Contact” has been
touched, this screen will be displayed.
Touch the desired data from the list.

163

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

PHONE

2. SETUP

■DELETING
DATA

THE

PHONEBOOK

The data can be deleted.
When selling or disposing of the vehicle, delete all your data on the system.
For PBAP compatible phones, delete
the phonebook data after setting “Automatically Download Contacts” to
“Off”. (See “PBAP compatible models
automatic data transfer setting” on
page 159.)

Touch “Delete Contacts”.

Touch the desired data or “Select
All”, then touch “Delete”.

 Multiple data can be selected and deleted
at the same time.

Touch “Yes”.

■ALTERNATIVE

PHONEBOOK
DATA DELETION METHOD

PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible
models

Press the
button or the
on the steering wheel.

Touch “Contacts” on the “Phone”
screen.

Touch the desired data from the list on
the “Contacts” screen.

Touch “Options”.

Touch “Delete”.

Touch “Yes”.

switch

INFORMATION

● When a Bluetooth® phone is deleted,
the phonebook data will be deleted at
the same time.

164

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

SPEED DIALS SETTING
Speed dials can be registered and deleted.

1
2
3
4

■THE “Speed Dials” SCREEN CAN
ALSO BE DISPLAYED

From the “Speed Dial” screen

Press the
button or the
on the steering wheel.

Touch “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.

Touch “Phonebook” on the “Phone
Settings” screen.

Touch “Speed Dials” on the “Phone”
screen.

Touch “Options”.

Press the “SETUP” button.

switch

Touch “Manage Speed Dials”.

Perform each setting according to the
procedures outlined on the following
pages.

Press the
button or the
on the steering wheel.

Touch “Contacts” on the “Phone”
screen.

Touch “Options”.

Touch “Manage Speed Dials”.

switch

165

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

PHONE

From the “Contacts” screen

2. SETUP

■REGISTERING THE SPEED DIAL

Touch the desired speed dial location.

If a location that is already in use is
touched, this screen will be displayed.

Speed dial numbers can be registered
by selecting the desired number from
the phonebook. Up to 18 numbers per
phone can be registered as a speed dial.

Touch “New”.

Touch the desired data to be registered.
 Touch “Yes” to replace it.

When this screen is displayed, the operation is complete.

Touch the desired phone number.

166

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

■THE SPEED DIAL CAN ALSO BE
REGISTERED

Touch the desired phone number.

From the “Speed Dial” screen

Press the
button or the
on the steering wheel.

Touch “Speed Dials” on the “Phone”
screen.

Touch “(add new)”.

switch

From the “Contact” screen

Press the
button or the
on the steering wheel.

Touch “Contacts” on the “Phone”
screen.

Touch the desired data from the list on
the “Contacts” screen.

switch

PHONE

Touch “Yes” to set new speed dial.

Touch “Options”.

Touch the desired data to be registered.

Touch “Set Speed Dial”.

167

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

This screen is displayed.

DELETING CALL HISTORY
The call history can be deleted.

 The following operations are performed in
the same manner as when they are performed from the “Setup” screen.

■DELETING THE SPEED DIAL
The speed dial can be deleted.

Touch “Delete”.

Touch the desired data, or to delete all
the data touch “Select All”, then touch
“Delete”.

For PBAP compatible phones, delete
the call history after setting “Automatically Download Call History” to
“Off”. (See “PBAP compatible models
automatic data transfer setting” on
page 159.)

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Phonebook” on the “Phone
Settings” screen.

Touch “Delete Call History”.

Touch the desired history be deleted.

Touch “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.

 Multiple data can be selected and deleted
at the same time.

Touch “Yes”.

168

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

Touch the desired data, or to delete all
the data touch “Select All”, then touch
“Delete”.

 Multiple data can be selected and deleted
at the same time.

Touch “Yes”.

■THE CALL HISTORY CAN ALSO BE
DELETED

Press the
button or the
on the steering wheel.

Touch “Call History” on the “Phone”
screen.

Touch “Delete”.

This screen is displayed.

 The following operations are performed in
the same manner as when they are performed from the “Setup” screen.
 Other call history can be operated similarly.

Deleting after call history has been displayed

Press the
button or the
on the steering wheel.

Touch “Call History” on the “Phone”
screen.

Touch the desired history to be deleted.

Touch “Delete”.

Touch “Yes”.

switch

169

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

PHONE

2. SETUP

THE “Messaging Settings”
SCREEN CAN ALSO BE
DISPLAYED

MESSAGE SETTINGS
Message settings can be changed.

1
2
3

Press the “SETUP” button.
Touch “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.
Touch “Messaging Settings”.

Perform each setting according to the
procedures outlined on the following
pages.

Press the
button or the
on the steering wheel.

Touch “Messages” on the “Phone”
screen.

Touch “Options”.

switch

SCREEN FOR “Messaging
Settings”

Touch “Save” when each setting is
completed.

 On this screen, the following functions can
be operated:

170

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

No.

Function

No.

Function

Touch to set message forwarding
from cellular phones to “On” or
“Off”.

Touch to edit quick reply messages.
(See “EDIT QUICK REPLY MESSAGES” on page 173.)

Touch to set the new message notification display to “On” or “Off”.

 To reset all setup items, touch “Default”.

Touch to set the new message voice
notification to “On” or “Off”.
Touch to adjust the new message notification volume. (See “NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION VOLUME
SETTINGS” on page 171.)
Touch to select a new message voice
notification tone. (See “NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION TONE SETTINGS” on page 172.)

NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION
VOLUME SETTINGS
The new message notification volume
can be adjusted.

Touch “New Message Notification
Volume”.

Touch “-” or “+” to adjust the new
message notification volume.

Touch “OK”.

Touch to adjust the message read out
volume. (See “MESSAGE READ
OUT VOLUME SETTINGS” on page
172.)
Touch to set the cellular phone’s message read and unread status update
function to “On” or “Off”.

171

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

PHONE

Touch to set the automatic message
read out function to “On” or “Off”.

INFORMATION

● Depending on the phone, these functions may not be available.

2. SETUP

MESSAGE READ OUT VOLUME
SETTINGS

INFORMATION

● The system will automatically increase
the volume when the speed exceeds 50
mph (80 km/h).

NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION
TONE SETTINGS

Message read out volume can be adjusted.

Touch “Message Readout Volume”.

Touch “-” or “+” to adjust the message
read out volume.

Touch “OK”.

A new message voice notification tone
can be selected.

Touch “New Message Notification
Tone”.

Touch the desired new message notification tone.

INFORMATION

● The system will automatically increase
the volume when the speed exceeds 50
mph (80 km/h).
 New message notification tones can be
heard by touching the screen buttons.

Touch “OK”.

172

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

EDIT QUICK REPLY
MESSAGES
Quick reply messages can be edited.
15 messages have already been
stored.

INITIALIZING THE SETTINGS
The settings can be initialized.

Touch “Default”.

Touch “Yes”.

Touch “Edit Quick Reply Messages”.

Touch the screen button corresponding to the desired message.

Use the software keyboard to edit the
message.

Touch “OK”.

PHONE

173

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

PHONE DISPLAY SETTINGS

SCREEN FOR “Phone Display
Settings”

The phone display settings can be
changed.

1
2
3

Press the “SETUP” button.
Touch “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.
Touch “Phone Display Settings”.
 On this screen, the following functions can
be operated:
No.

Perform each setting according to the
procedures outlined on the following
pages.

Function
Touch to change the incoming call
display. (See “INCOMING CALL
DISPLAY” on page 175.)
For PBAP compatible models, touch
to set the display of the automatic
phonebook transfer completion
message to “On” or “Off”.
For PBAP compatible models, touch
to set the display of the automatic
call history transfer completion message to “On” or “Off”.

When each setting is completed, touch
“Save”.

For PBAP compatible models, touch
to set the display of images during
calls to “On” or “Off”.
For PBAP compatible models, touch
to set the orientation of images displayed during calls. (See “ROTATING CONTACT IMAGES” on page
176.)

 To reset all setup items, touch “Default”.

174

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

INFORMATION

● Depending on the phone, these functions may not be available even if the
phone is PBAP compatible.

Touch “Full
Down”.

Screen”

“Drop

INCOMING CALL DISPLAY
The type of incoming call display can
be selected.

Touch “Incoming
Mode”.

Call

Display

Function

“Full Screen”

When a call is received,
the hands-free screen is
displayed and it can be
operated on the screen.

“Drop Down”

The message is displayed on the upper side
of the screen and it can
only be operated via the
steering wheel switches.

Touch “Save”.

175

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

PHONE

Screen button

2. SETUP

ROTATING CONTACT IMAGES
For PBAP compatible models, when
“Contact Image for Incoming Calls”
is set to “On”, images stored together
with phone numbers in the cellular
phone’s phonebook will be transferred
and displayed during the incoming call.
The orientation of the image can be
set.

INITIALIZING THE SETTINGS
The settings can be initialized.

Touch “Default”.

Touch “Yes”.

Touch “Rotate Contact Images”.

Select the desired orientation of the image to be displayed.

Touch “Save”.

176

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
A Bluetooth® device can be set up.

Press the “SETUP” button.

REGISTERED DEVICES
A Bluetooth® device can be registered,
deleted or set up.

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Registered Devices”.

Touch “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup”
screen.

Touch “Bluetooth*”.
4

Perform each setting according to the
procedures outlined on the following
pages.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

177

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

PHONE

2. SETUP

REGISTERING A Bluetooth®
DEVICE
Bluetooth® devices compatible with
phones (HFP) and portable players
(AVP) can be registered simultaneously. Phones (HFP) and portable players
(AVP) (maximum of 5) can be registered.

Touch “Add New” to register a
Bluetooth® device to the system.

 Search for the navigation system
displayed on the system’s screen using
your Bluetooth® device, and register the
Bluetooth® device.
For details about operating the Bluetooth®
device, see the manual that comes with it.
 A passcode is not required for SSP
(Secure Simple Pairing) compatible
Bluetooth® devices. Depending on the
type of Bluetooth® phone being
connected,
a
message
confirming
registration may be displayed on the
Bluetooth® phone’s screen. Respond and
operate the Bluetooth® phone according
to the confirmation message.
 To cancel the registration, touch
“Cancel”.

When the connection is completed,
this screen is displayed.

 If 5 Bluetooth® devices have already been
registered, a registered device needs to
be deleted. See “When 5 Bluetooth®
devices have already been registered” on
page 179.

When this screen is displayed, operate
the Bluetooth® device.

 When using the same device, it is not necessary to register it again.

178

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

 When this screen is displayed, follow the
guidance on the screen to try again.

DELETING A Bluetooth®
DEVICE

Touch “Remove”.

Touch the desired device, or to delete
all the devices touch “Select All”, then
touch “Remove”.

 When another Bluetooth® device is currently connected, this screen is displayed.
 To disconnect the Bluetooth® device,
touch “Yes”.

When 5 Bluetooth® devices have already been registered

When 5
devices have already been registered, a registered device needs to be deleted. Touch “Yes”
to delete 1 or more.

Touch the device to be deleted, then
touch “Remove”.

Touch “Yes”.

Bluetooth®

PHONE

 Multiple devices can be selected and
deleted at the same time.

Touch “Yes”.
INFORMATION

● When deleting a Bluetooth® phone, the
phonebook data will be deleted at the
same time.

179

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

EDITING THE Bluetooth®
DEVICE

■CHANGING A DEVICE NAME

Touch “Details”.

Touch the device to be edited.

Touch “Device Name”.

Use the software keyboard to input the
device name and touch “OK”.

Confirm the device name and touch
“OK”.

The Bluetooth® device’s information
can be displayed on the screen. The
displayed information can also be edited.
“Device Name”: The name of the
Bluetooth® device which is displayed on
the screen. It can be changed to a desired
name.
• Even if the device name is changed, the
name registered in your Bluetooth®
device does not change.
“Device Address”: The device address is

unique to each device. It cannot be
changed.

• If 2 Bluetooth® devices have been registered with the same device name, the
devices can be distinguished referring to
the device’s address.

“My Phone Number”: The phone number
of the Bluetooth® phone is displayed on
the screen. Depending on the type of
phone, the phone number may not be displayed.
“Profiles”: The compatibility profile of the
Bluetooth® device is displayed on the
screen.
“Connect Portable Player from”: There
are 2 portable player connection settings
available; “Vehicle” and “Portable Player”.

180

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

■SETTING

PORTABLE
CONNECTION METHOD

PLAYER

Touch “Connect Portable Player
from”.

SELECTING A Bluetooth®
PHONE
If more than 1 Bluetooth® phone has
been registered, it is necessary to select which phone to connect to.
It is possible to select from up to 5 registered Bluetooth® devices (Phones
(HFP) and portable players (AVP)
(maximum of 5) can be registered.)

Touch the desired connection method.

 Depending on the portable player, the
“Vehicle” or “Portable Player” connection method may be best. As such, refer to
the manual that comes with the portable
player.

Touch “OK”.

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Connect Phone”.

Touch the phone to be connected.

Touch “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup”
screen.

 The indicator of the selected Bluetooth®
phone will turn on.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

181

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

PHONE

“Vehicle”: Touch to connect the audio
system to the portable player.
“Portable Player”: Touch to connect the
portable player to the audio system.

Although up to 5 Bluetooth® phones
can be registered in the system, only 1
Bluetooth® phone can function at a
time.

2. SETUP

 If the desired Bluetooth® phone is not
on the list, touch “Add New” to register
the phone. (See page 178.)
®

 The currently connected Bluetooth
phone’s screen button will have a
Bluetooth® mark displayed on it. If the
currently connected Bluetooth® phone’s
screen
button
is
touched,
the
Bluetooth® phone can be disconnected.
Touch “Yes” to disconnect.

When a phone is connected while
Bluetooth® audio is playing
 This screen is displayed, and the
Bluetooth® audio will stop temporarily.

This screen is displayed.
When another Bluetooth® device is connected
 When another Bluetooth® device is currently connected, this screen is displayed.
To disconnect the Bluetooth® device,
touch “Yes”.

When the result message is displayed,
the Bluetooth® phone can be used.

182

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

SELECTING PORTABLE
PLAYER
If more than 1 portable player has been
registered, it is necessary to select
which portable player to connect to.
It is possible to select from up to 5 registered Bluetooth® devices (Phones
(HFP) and portable players (AVP)
(maximum of 5) can be registered.)

 If the desired portable player is not on
the list, touch “Add New” to register the
portable player. (See page 178.)
 The currently connected portable
player’s screen button will have a
Bluetooth® mark displayed on it. If the
currently connected portable player’s
screen button is touched, the portable
player can be disconnected. Touch
“Yes” to disconnect.

This screen is displayed.

Although up to 5 portable players can
be registered in the system, only 1 portable player can function at a time.
Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Connect Portable Player”.

Touch the desired portable player to be
connected.

Touch “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup”
screen.

When the result message is displayed,
the portable player can be used.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

 The indicator of the selected portable
player will turn on.

183

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

PHONE

1
2

2. SETUP

When another Bluetooth® device is connected

This screen is displayed.

 When another Bluetooth® device is currently connected, this screen is displayed.
To disconnect it, touch “Yes”.

 The information displays the following
items:

DETAILED Bluetooth
SETTINGS

Screen button/
Screen item

Information

“Device Name”

This name will be displayed on the device
when it is connected. It
can be changed to a desired name.

“Passcode”

The password that was
set when the Bluetooth®
device was registered
can be changed.

Device Address

The device address is
unique to each device. It
cannot be changed.

Profiles

The compatibility profile
of the Bluetooth® device
is displayed on the
screen. (See pages 132
and 242.)

The Bluetooth settings can be confirmed and changed.

1
2

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings”.

Touch “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup”
screen.

 If it is desirable to change the settings,
refer to the following pages.
 When the settings have been changed,
touch “Save”.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

184

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

CHANGING THE Bluetooth®
SETTINGS

Touch “Bluetooth* Power”.

Touch “On” or “Off”.

The Bluetooth® settings can be
changed according to the following
procedures.

■CHANGING “Bluetooth* Power”
The “Bluetooth* Power” display shows
the following state.
When “Bluetooth* Power” is “On”:
The Bluetooth® device is automatically
connected when the “POWER” switch is in
ACCESSORY or ON mode.
When “Bluetooth* Power” is “Off”:

 The “Bluetooth* Power” auto connection
state can be set on or off.
• “On”: The auto connection is turned on.
• “Off”: The auto connection is turned off.
 The auto connection state cannot be
changed from “On” to “Off” while driving,
but it can be changed from “Off” to “On”.

Touch “Save”.

 In the event the state of “Bluetooth*
Power” is changed from “Off” to “On”,
Bluetooth® connection will begin.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

185

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

PHONE

The Bluetooth® device is disconnected,
and the system will not connect to it next
time.

2. SETUP

■EDITING THE DEVICE NAME

■EDITING THE PASSCODE

Touch “Device Name”.

Touch “Passcode”.

Use the software keyboard to input the
device name and touch “OK”.

Input a passcode and touch “OK”.

Touch “Save”.

186

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

■Bluetooth® DEVICE CONNECTION

INITIALIZING THE Bluetooth®
SETTINGS

STATUS DISPLAY SETTINGS

When “Bluetooth* Power” is “On”
and the “POWER” switch is in
ACCESSORY or ON mode, the
Bluetooth® phone and portable
player’s connection status can be
displayed.
(See
“CHANGING
“Bluetooth* Power”” on page 185.)

The settings can be initialized.

Touch “Default”.

Touch “Yes”.

Touch “Display Phone Status” or
“Display Portable Player Status”.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Touch “On”.

Touch “Save”.

187

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

PHONE

 If the state of “Bluetooth* Power” is
changed from “Off” into “On”, Bluetooth®
connection will begin.

5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
OPERATION

1. QUICK REFERENCE .................. 190
2. SOME BASICS ............................ 192
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM .............. 193
AUDIO SPLIT SCREEN DISPLAY....... 193
TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND
OFF.................................................... 193
SWITCHING BETWEEN
FUNCTIONS...................................... 194
DSP CONTROL ................................... 195
TONE AND BALANCE ......................... 195
SELECTING SCREEN SIZE ................ 196
DVD PLAYER....................................... 197
AUX PORT ........................................... 198
USB PORT ........................................... 198

3. RADIO OPERATION ................... 199
LISTENING TO THE RADIO................ 199
PRESETTING A STATION .................. 199
SELECTING A STATION ..................... 200
RADIO BROADCAST DATA
SYSTEM ............................................ 200
TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENT .............. 201

4. HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY
INFORMATION ......................... 202
USING HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY .... 202
AVAILABLE HD Radio™
TECHNOLOGY.................................. 203
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE............. 204

188

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
1

5. RADIO OPERATION
(XM Satellite Radio
BROADCAST) ........................... 206

8. USB MEMORY OPERATION...... 233
CONNECTING A USB MEMORY ........ 233
PLAYING A USB MEMORY ................ 234

HOW TO SUBSCRIBE TO AN XM
Satellite Radio ................................... 206

9. iPod OPERATION....................... 238

DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID.............. 207

CONNECTING iPod............................. 238

LISTENING TO SATELLITE RADIO ... 207

PLAYING iPod ..................................... 238

CHANNEL CATEGORY ...................... 208
PRESETTING A CHANNEL ................ 208
SELECTING A CHANNEL................... 208

10. Bluetooth® AUDIO
OPERATION ............................. 242

6. RADIO OPERATION (INTERNET
RADIO BROADCAST)............... 212
LISTENING TO INTERNET RADIO .... 212

7. DVD PLAYER OPERATION ........ 213

PLAYING Bluetooth® AUDIO............... 247

11. AUDIO/VIDEO REMOTE
CONTROLS (STEERING
SWITCHES)............................... 252
12. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
OPERATING HINTS.................. 254
RADIO RECEPTION............................ 254

INSERTING A DISC ............................ 213

USB MEMORY .................................... 256

PLAYING A DISC ................................ 214
PLAYING AN AUDIO DISC ................. 214

CARING FOR YOUR DVD PLAYER AND
DISC .................................................. 256

PLAYING AN MP3/WMA DISC ........... 216

MP3/WMA FILES................................. 258

OPERATING A DVD DISC.................. 219

CD-R AND CD-RW DISCS .................. 260

PLAYING A DVD DISC ....................... 220

TERMS ................................................ 260

DVD OPTIONS.................................... 222
DVD PLAYER AND DVD VIDEO
DISC INFORMATION ....................... 231

iPod...................................................... 255

EJECTING A DISC .............................. 213

IF THE PLAYER MALFUNCTIONS..... 230

CONNECTING A Bluetooth® AUDIO
PLAYER ............................................ 245

DISPLAYING THE TITLE
AND NAME ....................................... 209
IF THE SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
MALFUNCTIONS.............................. 210

SETUP

1. AUDIO SETTINGS ...................... 264
HD Radio™ SYSTEM SETTINGS ....... 264
iPod SETTINGS................................... 265

189

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

1. QUICK REFERENCE
Operations such as selecting a preset station and adjusting the sound balance are
carried out on the screen. Press the “RADIO” or “MEDIA” button to display the
audio/video screen.

190

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

No.

Name

Function

Page

Function menu tab

Touch the desired radio or media mode screen
tab.

194

Function menu display screen

Touch to control the selected radio or media
mode.

194

“TUNE SCROLL”
knob

Turn to step up and step down the station band,
change to the next or previous satellite radio
channel, or skip to the next or previous track,
DVD chapter, etc. Also, the knob can be used to
enter selections on the track/file and album/folder
screens by pressing it.

199, 207,
214, 216,
220, 234,
238, 247

“SEEK/TRACK”
button

Press the “ ” or “ ” button to seek up or down
for a station or channel or to access a desired
track, file or chapter.

200, 208,
214, 216,
220, 234,
238, 247

“SETUP” button

Press to display the “Setup” screen.

264

“MEDIA” button

Press to display the media control screen.

193

“RADIO” button

Press to display the radio control screen.

193

“ ·CLOSE”
button

Press to insert or eject a disc.

“PWR VOL” knob

Press to turn the audio/video system on and off,
and turn to adjust the volume.

193

191

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

197, 213

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

2. SOME BASICS
This section describes some of the basic features of the audio/video system.
Some information may not pertain to
your system.
Your audio/video system works when
the “POWER” switch is turned to ACCESSORY or ON mode.

CAUTION
● For vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada:
Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC Warning: Changes or modifications
in construction not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. Radio frequency exposure. This device is approved for Mobile
Application only and, to comply with
applicable FCC radio frequency exposure regulations, must be used with a
distance of at least 7.9 in. (20 cm)
between the antenna and the body of
any person at all time during use.

CAUTION
● Laser products
• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to
make any changes yourself. This is an
intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to
retrieve information from the surface of
compact discs. The laser is carefully
shielded so that its rays remain inside
the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any of its
parts since you may be exposed to
laser rays and dangerous voltages.
• This product utilizes a laser. Use of
controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

NOTICE
● To prevent the 12-volt battery from being
discharged, do not leave the audio/video
system on longer than necessary when
the hybrid system is not operating.

192

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
Press this switch to operate the voice
command system.

 For the operation of the voice command
system and its list of commands, see
pages 268 and 277.

The audio split screen can be displayed while the map screen is displayed. For details, see page 39.

“RADIO”, “MEDIA” button: Press to display screen buttons for the audio/video
system.
“PWR VOL” knob: Press to turn the audio/
video system on and off. Turn this knob to
adjust the volume. The system turns on in
the last mode used.
 A function that enables automatic return
to the previous screen from the audio/
video screen can be selected. See page
43 for details.

193

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

AUDIO SPLIT SCREEN
DISPLAY

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON
AND OFF

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

SWITCHING BETWEEN
FUNCTIONS

Each time the “RADIO” or “MEDIA”
button is pressed, the audio control
mode changes.

“RADIO” button: To display the “AM”,
“FM”, “SAT” and “Apps” tabs on the
screen. (Radio mode)
“MEDIA” button: To display the “DISC”,
“BT Audio”, “AUX”, “USB” and “iPod”
tabs on the screen. (Media mode)

INFORMATION

● If a disc is not inserted, the DVD player
cannot be turned on.
● The DVD player can be turned off by
ejecting a disc.
● When radio or media mode is selected,
the respective screen buttons are displayed on the screen.
● Dimmed screen buttons cannot be operated.
● If the system does not respond to a
touch of a screen button, move your finger away from the screen and then
touch it again.
● Wipe off fingerprints using a glass cleaning cloth. Do not use chemical cleaners
to clean the screen.

 Up to 4 tabs can be displayed on the
screen. Touch
or
, located
either side of the screen tabs, to display
tabs from the previous or next page.
 The desired audio mode can be found
by touching
or
and then
selecting that audio mode tab.

194

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

SURROUND FUNCTION

DSP CONTROL

Press the “RADIO” or “MEDIA” button.

Touch

This function can create a feeling of
presence.

1
2

Touch “Surround”.
Touch “ON” or “OFF”.

TONE AND BALANCE
TONE

Touch the “DSP” tab to display this
screen.

How good an audio program sounds is
largely determined by the mix of the
treble, mid and bass levels. In fact, different kinds of music and vocal programs usually sound better with
different mixes of treble, mid and bass.

4
5

Touch the desired items to be set.
Touch “OK”.

AUTOMATIC SOUND
LEVELIZER (ASL)

A good balance of the left and right stereo channels and of the front and rear
sound levels is also important.
Keep in mind that when listening to a
stereo recording or broadcast, changing the right/left balance will increase
the volume of 1 group of sounds while
decreasing the volume of another.

The system adjusts to the optimum volume and tone quality according to vehicle speed to compensate for
increased vehicle noise.

1
2

Touch “Automatic Sound Levelizer”.
Touch “ON” or “OFF”.

195

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

BALANCE

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

Touch the “Sound” tab to display this
screen.

SELECTING SCREEN SIZE
Before selecting screen size, it is necessary to insert a DVD disc and select
DISC mode.

Touch the desired screen button.
Screen button

Function

“Treble”
“+” or “-”

Touch to adjust highpitched tones.

“Mid”
“+” or “-”

Touch to adjust midpitched tones.

“Bass”
“+” or “-”

Touch to adjust lowpitched tones.

“Front” or “Rear”

Touch to adjust the
sound balance between
the front and rear
speakers.

“L” or “R”

Touch to adjust the
sound balance between
the left and right speakers.

1
2
3

Press the “MEDIA” button.

Touch “Wide”.

Touch the desired screen button.

Touch the “DISC” tab.
Touch “Options”.

Touch “OK”.
INFORMATION

● The tone of each mode (such as AM,
FM and DVD player) can be adjusted.

196

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

No.

Function
Touch to display a 3 : 4 screen, with
either side in black.
Touch to widen the 3 : 4 screen horizontally to fill the screen.

DVD PLAYER

When inserting a disc, press the
“ ·CLOSE” button and gently insert
the disc with the label facing up.

Touch to widen the 3 : 4 screen vertically and horizontally, by the same
ratio, to fill the screen.

 When
is touched, the previous
screen is displayed.

Touch “Save”.

NOTICE
● Never try to disassemble or oil any part
of the DVD player. Do not insert anything other than a disc into the slot.

197

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

INFORMATION

● The player is intended for use with 4.7
in. (12 cm) discs only.

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUX PORT
The sound of portable audio players
connected to the AUX port can be enjoyed. For details, refer to “Owner’s
Manual”.

Press the “MEDIA” button to display
the media control screen and touch the
“AUX” tab or press the “MEDIA” button repeatedly to change to AUX
mode.

CAUTION
● Do not connect portable audio device or
operate the controls while driving.

USB PORT
A USB memory/iPod can be connected to the USB port. For details, see
“CONNECTING A USB MEMORY” on
page 233 and “CONNECTING iPod”
on page 238.

Press the “MEDIA” button to display
the media control screen and touch the
“USB” or “iPod” tab or press the
“MEDIA” button repeatedly to change
to USB memory/iPod mode.
INFORMATION

● When a USB memory/iPod is not connected with the USB port, the tab will be
dimmed.

NOTICE
● Do not leave portable audio device in
the vehicle. The temperature inside the
vehicle may become high, resulting in
damage to the player.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable audio
device while it is connected as this may
damage the portable audio device or its
terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port
as this may damage the portable audio
device or its terminal.
INFORMATION

● When the portable audio player is not
connected to the AUX port, the tab will
be dimmed.

198

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

3. RADIO OPERATION
LISTENING TO THE RADIO
SELECTING A RADIO STATION

Press the “RADIO” button to display
the radio control screen.

INFORMATION

● The radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a stereo broadcast
is received.

PRESETTING A STATION
Radio mode has a mix preset function,
which can store up to 36 stations (6
stations per page x 6 pages) from any
of the AM, FM or SAT bands.

1
2
2

Touch the “AM”, “FM”, “SAT” or
“Apps” tab or press the “RADIO” button repeatedly to select the desired
tab.

Tune in the desired station.
Touch one of the left side screen buttons (1-6) and hold it until a beep is
heard. This sets the frequency to the
screen button. The station’s frequency
will be displayed in the screen button.

Turn the knob clockwise to step up the
station band or counterclockwise to
step down.
 To change the preset station to a different
one, follow the same procedure.

199

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

STEP UP AND DOWN THE
STATION BAND

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

SELECTING A STATION
Tune in the desired station using one
of the following methods.
Preset tuning: Touch one of the mix preset channels on the left side of the screen
to select the desired station. The screen
button is highlighted and the station frequency appears on the screen.
Seek tuning: Press the “ ” or “ ” button
of “SEEK/TRACK”. The radio will begin
seeking up or down for a station of the
nearest frequency and will stop when a
station is found. Each time the button is
pressed, the stations will be searched automatically one after another.
To scan all the frequencies: Touch
“SCAN”. “SCAN” will appear on the
screen. The radio will find the next station
and stay there for 10 seconds if “All” or
“HD Only” is selected, or 5 seconds if
“Analog” is selected, and then scan
again. To stay tuned to a station and stop
the scanning, touch “SCAN” again. (To
set HD Radio™ system, see page 264.)

RADIO BROADCAST DATA
SYSTEM
This audio system is equipped with Radio Broadcast Data Systems (RBDS).
RBDS mode allows text messages to
be received from radio stations that utilize RBDS transmitters.
When RBDS is on, the radio can
— only select stations of a particular
program type,
— display messages from radio stations,
— search for a stronger signal station.
RBDS features are available only
when listening to an FM station that
broadcasts RBDS information and the
“FM info” indicator is on.
SELECTING A DESIRED TYPE

Touch “Options”.

200

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

Touch “TYPE ” or “ TYPE” to
move forward and backward through
the program list.

A station that regularly broadcasts traffic information is automatically located.

“Traffic”: Touch to seek a traffic program
station. “TRAF SEEK” will appear on the
screen.
INFORMATION

● If no traffic program station is found, “No
Traffic” will appear on the screen.
● If a traffic program station is found, the
name of the traffic program station will
be displayed for a while.

Touch “TYPE SEEK” and the system
will start to seek for stations in the relevant program type.
INFORMATION

● If no relevant program can be found, “no
type” will appear on the screen.

201

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

 Once a program type has been set,
“TYPE SEEK” will appear on the screen.
 The program list is in the following order:
• Classical
• Country
• EasyLis (Easy Listening)
• Inform (Information)
• Jazz
• News
• Oldies
• Other
• Pop Music
• Religion
• Rock
• R&B (Rhythm and Blues)
• Sports
• Talk
• Traffic (Not available when “HD Radio
Settings” are set to analog.)
• Alert (Emergency Alert)

TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENT

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

4. HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY INFORMATION
HD Radio™ Technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
radio product has a special receiver
which allows it to receive digital
broadcasts (where available) in
addition to the analog broadcasts it
already receives. Digital broadcasts
have better sound quality than analog
broadcasts as digital broadcasts
provide free, crystal clear audio with no
static or distortion. For more
information, and a guide to available
radio stations and programming, refer
to www.hdradio.com.

USING HD Radio™
TECHNOLOGY

Press the “RADIO” button to display
the radio control screen.

Touch the “AM” or “FM” tab or press
the “RADIO” button repeatedly to select the desired tab.

 As a user works through the analog radio
stations, (where applicable) the radio
receiver will automatically tune from an
analog signal to a digital signal within 10
seconds.
 An orange “HD)” logo indicator will be displayed on the screen when in digital. The
“HD)” logo will first appear in a gray color
indicating the station is indeed (an analog
and) a digital station. Once the digital signal is acquired, the logo will change to a
bright orange color.
 The song title, artist name and music
genre will appear on the screen when
available by the radio station.

This screen will be displayed if
“Options” is touched.

202

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

 When “Text” is touched, information such
as the artist name, song title, album title
and music genre of the track being listened to are displayed on the text screen.
To display messages from the station,
touch “Additional Information”.

TAG

Touch “Tag” to bookmark the music
information.

Open the cover and connect iPod using an iPod cable.

 When “TYPE ” or “ TYPE” is
touched, a program type will be searched.
Once a program type has been set,
“TYPE SEEK” will appear on the screen.
(See “SELECTING A DESIRED TYPE” on
page 200.)

AVAILABLE HD Radio™
TECHNOLOGY
MULTICAST
On the FM radio frequency most digital
stations have “multiple” or supplemental programs on one FM station.
Touch “Multicast”.

 Each time “Multicast” is touched, the
supplemental program changes.
 If “Multicast” is touched when tuned to
the last of the supplemental programs, the
main program will be returned to.

 Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not
turned on.
 Once an iPod is connected, the music tag
moves from the radio into the iPod.
 When the iPod is connected to iTunes, the
“tagged” information of the songs which
were tagged while listening to the radio
can be viewed. Then a user may decide to
purchase the song or CD/Album which
had been listened to on their radio.
INFORMATION

● If tagging the music information fails,
“Saving the HD Radio tag failed.” will be
displayed on the screen. If this occurs,
tag the information again.
● HD Radio™ stations can be preset.

203

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Experience

Cause

Action

Mismatch of time alignment- a user may hear a
short period of programming replayed or an echo,
stutter or skip.

The radio stations analog
and digital volume is not
properly aligned or the station is in ballgame mode.

None, radio broadcast issue. A
user can contact the radio station.

Sound fades, blending in
and out.

Radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.

Reception issue, may clear-up as
the vehicle continues to be driven.
Touching “Analog” can force radio in an analog audio.

Audio mute condition when
an HD2/HD3 multicast
channel had been playing.

The radio does not have
access to digital signals at
the moment.

This is normal behavior, wait until
the digital signal returns. If out of
the coverage area, seek a new
station.

Audio mute delay when selecting an HD2/HD3 multicast channel preset.

The digital multicast content is not available until
HD Radio™ broadcast can
be decoded and make the
audio available. This takes
up to 7 seconds.

This is normal behavior, wait for
the audio to become available.

Text information does not
match the present song audio.

Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.

Broadcaster should be notified.
Complete
the
form;
www.ibiquity.com/automotive/
report_radio_station_experiences.

No text information shown
for the present selected frequency.

Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.

Broadcaster should be notified.
Complete
the
form;
www.ibiquity.com/automotive/
report_radio_station_experiences.

204

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos
are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
205

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

5. RADIO OPERATION (XM Satellite Radio BROADCAST)
HOW TO SUBSCRIBE TO AN
XM Satellite Radio
To listen to a satellite radio broadcast
in the vehicle, a subscription to the XM
Satellite Radio service is necessary.
An XM Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts provided under a separate
subscription. Availability is limited to
the 48 contiguous U.S. states and
some Canadian provinces.

INFORMATION

● XM Satellite Radio is solely responsible
for the quality, availability and content of
the satellite radio services provided,
which are subject to the terms and conditions of the XM Satellite Radio customer service agreement.
● Customers should have their radio ID
ready; the radio ID can be found by tuning to “CH 000” on the radio. For details,
see “DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID”
below.
● All fees and programming are the
responsibility of XM Satellite Radio and
are subject to change.

HOW TO SUBSCRIBE
It is necessary to enter into a separate
service agreement with XM Satellite
Radio in order to receive satellite
broadcast programming in the vehicle.
Additional activation and service subscription fees apply that are not included in the purchase price of the vehicle
and digital satellite tuner.

SATELLITE TUNER
TECHNOLOGY NOTICE
Toyota’s satellite radio tuners are
awarded Type Approval Certificates
from XM Satellite Radio Inc. as proof of
compatibility with the services offered
by XM Satellite Radio.

 For complete information on subscription rates and terms, or to subscribe to
XM Satellite Radio:

U.S.A.
Refer to www.siriusxm.com or call
1-800-967-2346.
Canada
Refer to www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-209-0079.

206

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID
Each XM tuner is identified with a
unique radio ID. The radio ID is required when activating an XM service
or when reporting a problem.

LISTENING TO SATELLITE
RADIO

Press the “RADIO” button to display
the radio control screen.

Touch the “SAT” tab or press the
“RADIO” button repeatedly until the
“SAT” tab is selected to choose a satellite broadcast channel.

 If “CH 000” is selected using the
“TUNE SCROLL” knob, the ID code,
which is 8 alphanumeric characters, will
be displayed. If another channel is
selected, the ID code will no longer be displayed. The channel (000) alternates
between displaying the radio ID and the
specific radio code.

Turn the “TUNE SCROLL” knob to select the next or previous channel.

 Turning the knob quickly allows rapid
scrolling through the channel list.

207

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

CHANNEL CATEGORY

Touch either “TYPE ” or “ TYPE”
to go to the next or previous category.

PRESETTING A CHANNEL

Tune in the desired channel. Make
sure the desired channel is received.

Touch one of the left side screen buttons (1-6) and hold it until a beep is
heard. This sets the frequency to the
screen button. The channel number
will be displayed in the screen button.

SELECTING A CHANNEL
Tune in the desired channel using one
of the following methods.
Preset tuning: Touch the channel selector
screen button (1-6) to listen to the desired
channel. The selected screen button (1-6)
is highlighted and its related information
appears on the right side of the screen.
To select a channel within the current
category: Press the “ ” or “ ” button of
“SEEK/TRACK”. The radio will change up
or down to a channel within the current
channel category.

To scan the currently selected channel
category: Touch “SCAN”. “SCAN” appears on the screen. The radio will find the
next channel in the same channel category, stay there for a few seconds, and then
scan again. To select a channel, touch
“SCAN” again.
 To change the preset channel to a different one, follow the same procedure.

208

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

DISPLAYING THE TITLE AND
NAME

Touch “Text” to display the artist
name and song title currently being listening to.

INFORMATION

● Up to 64 alphanumeric characters can
be displayed. (Some information will not
be fully displayed.)

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
209

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

IF THE SATELLITE RADIO TUNER MALFUNCTIONS
When problems occur with the XM tuner, a message will appear on the screen. Referring to the table below to identify the problem, take the suggested corrective action.
Message

Ck Antenna

Ch Unauth

Explanation
The XM antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM antenna
cable is attached securely.
A short circuit occurs in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Toyota certified dealer for assistance.
You have not subscribed to XM Satellite Radio. The radio is being
updated with the latest encryption code. Contact XM Satellite Radio
for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can
choose “CH 000” and all free-to-air channels.
The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about
2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or
“CH 001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. To listen to the premium channel, contact XM Satellite Radio.

No Signal

The XM signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.

The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unit
has received the information.

Ch Off Air

The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel.

-----

There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with
the channel at that time. No action is required.

Ch Unavail

The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2
seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH 001”.
If it does not change automatically, select another channel.

INFORMATION

● Contact the XM Listener Care Center at 1-800-967-2346 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-209-0079
(Canada).

210

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

NOTICE

● This XM tuner supports “Audio Services”
(Music and Talk) of only XM Satellite
Radio and “Text Information*” linked to
the respective “Audio Services”.
*: Text Information includes, Station
Name, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title and
Category Name.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

● This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a
class B digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation.
● If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning
the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving
antenna.
• Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.
● Information to user
• Alternation or modifications carried
out without appropriate authorization
may invalidate the user’s right to
operate the equipment.

INFORMATION

211

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

6. RADIO OPERATION (INTERNET RADIO BROADCAST)
LISTENING TO INTERNET
RADIO
One of Entune’s features is the ability
to listen to internet radio. In order to
use this service, an Entune compatible
phone and the navigation system
needs to be set. For details, refer to the
“ENTUNE SERVICE” section. (See
page 304.)

Press the “RADIO” button.

 If a compatible phone is already registered, it will be connected automatically.
 If a compatible phone has not been registered or the Bluetooth® connection cannot
be completed correctly, touch “Connect”
to register and/or connect your phone.
(See page 177.)
 When connection is complete, the application screen can be displayed.

Touch “View Application Screen”.

 The internet radio application screen is
displayed.
 Perform operations according to the displayed application screen.
 By pressing the “RADIO” button, the
“Audio” screen can be returned to.
INFORMATION

Touch the “Apps” tab on the screen or
press the “RADIO” button repeatedly
until the “Apps” tab is selected.

● Other applications can be activated
while listening to internet radio.
● An iPhone cannot be connected via
Bluetooth® and USB connection at the
same time. However, it is possible to
recharge an iPhone while using Entune
by connecting via USB. The system
uses the connection method that was
used last. Therefore, if connected via
USB after Bluetooth® connection, it is
necessary to reconnect the iPhone via
Bluetooth®.
● Services requiring a separate contract
can also be used.*
● Some parts of “Apps” can be adjusted
using the switches on the steering
wheel.
● If internet radio has never been listened
to by activating “Apps” from the “Information” screen, the “Apps” tab will be
dimmed.

*: For
details,
refer
to
http://
www.Toyota.com/entune/ or call 1-800331-4331. Some internet radio has to be
linked to your account in Toyota website
before using it in the vehicle.

212

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

7. DVD PLAYER OPERATION
For safety reasons, the DVD video
discs can only be viewed when the following conditions are met:

Insert a disc into the disc slot.

(a)The vehicle is completely stopped.
(b)The “POWER” switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.
(c)The parking brake is applied.
While driving in DVD video mode, only
the DVD’s audio can be heard.

INSERTING A DISC

Press the “ ·CLOSE” button to slide
the display down.

 After insertion, the disc is automatically
loaded.

Press the “

·CLOSE” button.

 The display will slide up, closing the DVD
slot.
 Touching “ Disc” ejects the currently
inserted disc.
5

EJECTING A DISC
Press the “ ·CLOSE” button to slide
the display down.

 The display will slide down, opening the
DVD slot.

 When the “ ·CLOSE” button is pressed,
the disc will be automatically ejected.

Press the “
the display.

·CLOSE” button to close

213

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

CAUTION
● Do not place anything on the opened
display, as such items may be thrown
about and possibly injure people in the
vehicle during sudden braking or in an
accident.
● To reduce the chance of injury in case of
an accident or sudden stop while driving, keep the display closed.
● Take care not to jam your hand while the
display is moving. Otherwise, you could
be injured.

NOTICE
● Do not obstruct the display while it is
moving. It could damage your audio system.
INFORMATION

● Under extremely cold conditions, the
screen may react slowly or operation
sound may become louder.
● If a disc is inserted with the label facing
down, it cannot be played.

PLAYING AN AUDIO DISC

Touch the “DISC” tab.

 When CD-TEXT information exists, the
name and artist of the CD currently being
listened to will be displayed.

: Touch to pause the track.
: Touch to resume playing the track.

SELECTING A DESIRED
TRACK

■ON THE AUDIO TOP SCREEN

PLAYING A DISC

Press the “MEDIA” button if a disc has
already been loaded in the disc slot.

Touch the “DISC” tab or press the
“MEDIA” button repeatedly until the
“DISC” tab is selected.

“SEEK/TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or
“ ” button of “SEEK/TRACK” repeatedly
until the desired track number appears on
the screen. The player will start playing the
selected track from the beginning.
“TUNE SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to skip to
the desired track.

214

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

■ON THE TRACK LIST SCREEN

Touch the track name screen button to
display the CD’s track list.

Touch the desired track number. The
player will start playing the selected
track from the beginning.

■FAST FORWARDING OR REWINDING

Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button
of “SEEK/TRACK” to fast forward or
rewind the disc.

, : Touch to move the list up or down
by 5 track groups. If either of these screen
buttons is touched when the top/bottom
page of the list is displayed, the last/first
page is displayed.

 When the button is released, the player
resumes playing from that position.

“SEEK/TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or
“ ” button of “SEEK/TRACK” to scroll
through the track list one by one.

The track currently being listened to
can be repeated.

■REPEATING A TRACK

Touch “RPT” while the track is playing.

, : If
appears to the right of an item
name, the complete name is too long for
the screen. Touch
to scroll to the end of
the name. Touch
to move to the beginning of the name.
 “RPT” appears on the screen. When the
track is finished, the player will automatically play it again. To cancel this function,
touch “RPT” again.

215

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

“TUNE SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly
scroll up or down the track list. To select
the desired track, press the knob.

REPEATING

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

RANDOM ORDER
Tracks or albums can be automatically
and randomly selected.

PLAYING AN MP3/WMA DISC

Touch the “DISC” tab.

■PLAYING THE TRACKS ON THE
DISC IN RANDOM ORDER

Touch “RAND” while the disc is playing.
 The file name, folder name and artist
name currently being listened to and the
disc icon are displayed on the screen.

: Touch to pause the file.
: Touch to resume playing the file.
 Once “RAND” appears on the screen, the
system selects a track randomly from the
disc currently being listened to. To cancel
this function, touch “RAND” again.

SELECTING A DESIRED
FOLDER

■ON THE AUDIO TOP SCREEN

INFORMATION

● If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title of
the disc and track will be displayed. Up
to 32 characters can be displayed.

, : Touch to skip to the next or previous folder.

216

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

■ON THE FOLDER LIST SCREEN

Touch the folder name screen button
to display the following folder list
screen.

Touch the desired folder number to
display the folder’s file list. From the file
list, select the desired file number.

, : Touch to move the list up or down
by 5 folder groups. If either of these screen
buttons is touched when the top/bottom
page of the list is displayed, the last/first
page is displayed.

, : If
appears to the right of an item
name, the complete name is too long for
the screen. Touch
to scroll to the end of
the name. Touch
to move to the beginning of the name.

ING

Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button
of “SEEK/TRACK” to fast forward or
rewind the file.

 When the button is released, the player
resumes playing from that position.

SELECTING A DESIRED FILE

■ON THE AUDIO TOP SCREEN

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

“TUNE SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly
scroll up or down the folder list. To select
the desired folder, press the knob.

■FAST FORWARDING OR REWIND-

“SEEK/TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or
“ ” button of “SEEK/TRACK” repeatedly
until the desired file number appears on
the screen. The player will start playing the
selected file from the beginning.
“TUNE SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to skip to
the desired file.

217

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

■ON THE FILE LIST SCREEN

Touch the file name screen button to
display the following file list screen.

Touch the desired file number. The
player will start playing the selected file
from the beginning.

■FAST FORWARDING OR REWINDING

Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button
of “SEEK/TRACK” to fast forward or
rewind the file.

, : Touch to move the list up or down
by 5 file groups. If either of these screen
buttons is touched when the top/bottom
page of the list is displayed, the last/first
page is displayed.

 When the button is released, the player
resumes playing from that position.

“SEEK/TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or
“ ” button of “SEEK/TRACK” to scroll
through the file list one by one.

The file or folder currently being listened to can be repeated.

“TUNE SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly
scroll up or down the file list. To select the
desired file, press the knob.

REPEATING

■REPEATING A FILE

Touch “RPT” while the file is playing.

, : If
appears to the right of an item
name, the complete name is too long for
the screen. Touch
to scroll to the end of
the name. Touch
to move to the beginning of the name.

218

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

 Each time “RPT” is touched, the mode
changes as follows:

When “RAND” is off

• File Repeat Folder Repeat Off

When “RAND” is on

• File RepeatOff
 “RPT” appears on the screen. When the
file is finished, the player will automatically
play it again. To cancel this function, touch
“RPT” repeatedly until the repeat mode
turns off.

■REPEATING A FOLDER

Touch
“RPT”
repeatedly
until
“FLD.RPT” appears on the screen.

 When the folder is finished, the player will
automatically go back to the beginning of
the folder and play it again. To cancel this
function, touch “RPT” again.

RANDOM ORDER

■PLAYING FILES FROM ONE FOLDER IN RANDOM ORDER

Touch “RAND” while the disc is playing.

■PLAYING THE FILES IN ALL THE
FOLDERS ON THE DISC IN RANDOM ORDER

Touch “RAND” repeatedly until
“FLD.RAND” appears on the screen.

 Once “FLD.RAND” appears on the
screen, the system selects a file randomly
from all of the existing folders. To cancel
this function, touch “RAND” again.
INFORMATION

● When a file is skipped or the system is
inoperative, touch “RAND” to reset.

OPERATING A DVD DISC
The playback condition of some DVD
discs may be determined by the DVD
software producer. This DVD player
plays a disc as the software producer
intended. As such some functions may
not work properly. Be sure to read the
instruction manual that comes with the
individual DVD disc. For detailed information about DVD video discs, see
“DVD PLAYER AND DVD VIDEO
DISC INFORMATION” on page 231.

219

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

Files or folders can be automatically
and randomly selected.

 Each time “RAND” is touched, the mode
changes as follows:
• Random (1 Folder Random)
Folder Random (1 Disc Random) Off
 Once “RAND” appears on the screen, the
system selects a file randomly from the
folder currently being listened to. To cancel this function, touch “RAND” repeatedly until the random mode turns off.

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

PRECAUTIONS ON DVD VIDEO
DISC
When recording with a DVD video, audio tracks may not record in some cases while the menu is displayed. As
audio will not play in this case, verify
that the video tracks are playing and
then activate playback.

PLAYING A DVD DISC

1
2

Press the “MEDIA” button.
Touch the “DISC” tab or press the
“MEDIA” button repeatedly until the
“DISC” tab is selected.

When playback of a disc is completed:
If an audio CD or MP3/WMA disc is
playing, the first track or file starts.
If a DVD video is playing, playback will
stop or the menu screen will be displayed.
The title/chapter number and playback
time display may not appear while
playing back certain DVD video discs.

CAUTION
● Conversational speech on some DVDs
is recorded at a low volume to emphasize the impact of sound effects. If you
adjust the volume assuming that the
conversations represent the maximum
volume level that the DVD will play, you
may be startled by louder sound effects
or when you change to a different audio
source. The louder sounds may have a
significant impact on the human body or
pose a driving hazard. Keep this in mind
when you adjust the volume.

 Touch “Options” on the “DVD” screen,
then touch “Wide” on the “DVD Options”
screen. The screen mode can be
changed.
 If “Full Screen” is touched when the vehicle is completely stopped and the parking
brake is applied, the video screen returns.

DISPLAYING DVD CONTROLS

 If
is touched, while watching a DVD,
the DVD controls will appear.
INFORMATION

● If
appears on the screen when a control is touched, the operation relevant to
the control is not permitted.

220

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

DESCRIPTION OF DVD VIDEO
CONTROLS
Screen button

Function

“Top Menu”,
“Menu”

Touch to display the menu
screen for DVD video.

SELECTING A MENU ITEM

Select the menu item using

,
or
and touch
“Enter”. The player starts playing the
disc from the start of the selected item.

The menu control key appears on the screen. (See
page 221.)
Touch to pause the video
screen.
Touch to rewind during
playback.
Touch to stop the video
screen.
Touch to resume normal
play during pause.

INFORMATION

● According to the DVD disc, some menu
items can be selected directly. (For
details, see the manual that comes with
the DVD disc provided separately.)

■CHANGING A CHAPTER

Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button
of “SEEK/TRACK” or turn the
“TUNE SCROLL” knob to change the
chapter.

221

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

Touch to fast forward during playback and forward
frame by frame during
pause.

 When
is touched, the previous
screen is displayed.

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

DVD OPTIONS

No.

Function

1
2

Press the “MEDIA” button.

Touch to display the title search
screen. (See page 223.)

Touch the “DISC” tab or press the
“MEDIA” button repeatedly until the
“DISC” tab is selected.

Touch to display the predetermined
scene on the screen and start playing.

Touch “Options”.

Touch to display the audio selection
screen. (See page 223.)
Touch to display the subtitle selection screen. (See page 223.)
Touch to display the angle selection
screen. (See page 223.)
Touch to display the screen mode
screen. (See page 196.)

This screen is displayed.

Touch to display the image quality
adjustment screen. (See page 224.)
Touch to display the initial setup
screen. (See page 225.)

222

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

SEARCHING BY TITLE

Touch “Search” on the “DVD Options”
screen.

Enter the title number and touch “OK”.

 The player starts playing video for that title
number.
 If the wrong numbers are entered, touch
to delete the numbers.
 When
is touched, the previous
screen is displayed.

Touch “Audio” on the “DVD Options”
screen.

Each time “Change” is touched, the
audio language is changed.

Touch “Subtitle” on the “DVD Options” screen.

Each time “Change” is touched, the
language the subtitles are displayed in
is changed.

 The languages available are restricted to
those available on the DVD disc.
 When “Hide” is touched, the subtitles can
be hidden.

is touched, the previous
 When
screen is displayed.

CHANGING THE ANGLE
The angle can be selected for discs
that are multi-angle compatible when
the angle mark appears on the screen.

Touch “Angle” on the “DVD Options”
screen.

Each time “Change” is touched, the
angle is changed.

 The languages available are restricted to
those available on the DVD disc.
 When
is touched, the previous
screen is displayed.

223

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

CHANGING THE AUDIO
LANGUAGE

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE
LANGUAGE

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

Screen button

Function

“Contrast” “+”

Touch to strengthen the
contrast of the screen.

“Contrast” “-”

Touch to weaken the
contrast of the screen.

“Brightness” “+”

Touch to brighten the
screen.

“Brightness” “-”

Touch to darken the
screen.

“Color” “R”

Touch to strengthen the
red color of the screen.

“Color” “G”

Touch to strengthen the
green color of the
screen.

“Tone” “+”

Touch to strengthen the
tone of the screen.

“Tone” “-”

Touch to weaken the
tone of the screen.

 The angles available are restricted to
those available on the DVD disc.
 When
is touched, the previous
screen is displayed.

AUDIO SCREEN ADJUSTMENT
The brightness, contrast, color and
tone of the screen can be adjusted. In
addition, the display can be turned off
and the screen can be changed to either day or night mode.

■CONTRAST, BRIGHTNESS, COLOR
AND TONE ADJUSTMENT

Touch “Display” on the “DVD Options” screen.

Touch “ ” or “ ” to display the desired item to be adjusted.

After adjusting the screen, touch
“OK”.

 The screen goes off when “Screen Off” is
touched. To turn the screen back on,
press any button. The selected screen
appears.

224

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

DVD SETTINGS

Touch “DVD Settings” on the “DVD
Options” screen.

Touch the items to be set.

■AUDIO LANGUAGE
The audio language can be changed.

Touch “Audio Language” on the
“DVD Settings” screen.

Touch the desired language to be
heard on the “Audio Language”
screen.

 If the desired language to be heard cannot
be found on this screen, touch “Other”
and enter a language code. For entry of a
language code, see “ENTER AUDIO/
SUBTITLE/MENU LANGUAGE CODE” on
page 227.
 To return to the “DVD Settings” screen,
touch
.

Touch “Save” on the “DVD Settings”
screen.

■SUBTITLE LANGUAGE
After the initial setting has been
changed, touch “Save”.

 This screen will close, and the system will
return to the previous screen.
 When “Default” is touched, all menus are
initialized.

The subtitle language can be changed.

Touch “Subtitle Language” on the
“DVD Settings” screen.

Touch the desired language to be read
on the “Subtitle Language” screen.

 If the desired language to be read cannot
be found on this screen, touch “Other”
and enter a language code. For entry of a
language code, see “ENTER AUDIO/
SUBTITLE/MENU LANGUAGE CODE” on
page 227.
 To return to the “DVD Settings” screen,
touch
.

Touch “Save” on the “DVD Settings”
screen.

225

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

■MENU LANGUAGE
The language on the DVD video menu
can be changed.

■PARENTAL LOCK
The level of viewer restrictions can be
changed.

Touch “Menu Language” on the
“DVD Settings” screen.

Touch “Parental Lock” on the “DVD
Settings” screen.

Touch the desired language to be read
on the “Menu Language” screen.

Enter the 4-digit personal code on the
“Key Code” screen.

Touch “Save” on the “DVD Settings”
screen.

 If the wrong numbers are entered, touch
to delete the numbers.
 To return to the “DVD Settings” screen,
touch
.

 To return to the “DVD Settings” screen,
touch
.

■ANGLE MARK
The multi-angle mark can be turned on
or off on the screen while discs that are
multi-angle compatible are being
played.

Touch a parental level (1-8) on the “Select Restriction Level” screen.

Touch “Save” on the “DVD Settings”
screen.

■AUTO START PLAYBACK
Discs that are inserted while the vehicle is in motion will automatically start
playing. Certain discs may not play.

Touch “Angle Mark” on the “DVD Settings” screen.

2
3

Touch “On” or “Off”.

Touch “Auto Start Playback” on the
“DVD Settings” screen.

2
3

Touch “On” or “Off”.

Touch “Save” on the “DVD Settings”
screen.

226

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

■SOUND DYNAMIC RANGE
The difference between the lowest volume and the highest volume can be
adjusted.

Touch “Sound Dynamic Range” on
the “DVD Settings” screen.

2
3

Touch “MAX”, “STD” or “MIN”.
Touch “Save” on the “DVD Settings”
screen.

ENTER AUDIO/SUBTITLE/
MENU LANGUAGE CODE
If “Other” on the “Audio Language”
screen, “Subtitle Language” screen or
“Menu Language” screen is touched,
the desired language to be heard or
read can be selected by entering a
language code.

Enter the 4-digit language code.

2
3

Touch “OK”.
Touch “Save” on the “DVD Settings”
screen.

227

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

 If the wrong numbers are entered, touch
to delete the numbers.
 To return to the “DVD Settings” screen,
touch
.

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

Code

Language

Code

Language

0514

English

0301

Catalan

1001

Japanese

0315

Corsican

0618

French

0319

Czech

0405

German

0325

Welsh

0920

Italian

0401

Danish

0519

Spanish

0426

Bhutani

2608

Chinese

0515

Esperanto

1412

Dutch

0520

Estonian

1620

Portuguese

0521

Basque

1922

Swedish

0601

Persian

1821

Russian

0609

Finnish

1115

Korean

0610

Fiji

0512

Greek

0615

Faroese

0101

Afar

0625

Frisian

0102

Abkhazian

0701

Irish

0106

Afrikaans

0704

Scottish-Gaelic

0113

Amharic

0712

Galician

0118

Arabic

0714

Guarani

0119

Assamese

0721

Gujarati

0125

Aymara

0801

Hausa

0126

Azerbaijani

0809

Hindi

0201

Bashkir

0818

Croatian

0205

Byelorussian

0821

Hungarian

0207

Bulgarian

0825

Armenian

0208

Bihari

0901

Interlingua

0209

Bislama

0905

Interlingue

0214

Bengali, Bangla

0911

Inupiak

0215

Tibetan

0914

Indonesian

0218

Breton

0919

Icelandic

228

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

Code

Language

Code

Language

0923

Hebrew

1503

Occitan

1009

Yiddish

1513

(Afan) Oromo

1023

Javanese

1518

Oriya

1101

Georgian

1601

Panjabi

1111

Kazakh

1612

Polish

1112

Greenlandic

1619

Pashto, Pushto

1113

Cambodian

1721

Quechua

1114

Kannada

1813

Rhaeto-Romance

1119

Kashmiri

1814

Kirundi

1121

Kurdish

1815

Romanian

1125

Kirghiz

1823

Kinyarwanda

1201

Latin

1901

Sanskrit

1214

Lingala

1904

Sindhi

1215

Laotian

1907

Sango

1220

Lithuanian

1908

Serbo-Croatian

1222

Latvian, Lettish

1909

Sinhalese

1307

Malagasy

1911

Slovak

1309

Maori

1912

Slovenian

1311

Macedonian

1913

Samoan

1312

Malayalam

1914

Shona

1314

Mongolian

1915

Somali

1315

Moldavian

1917

Albanian

1318

Marathi

1918

Serbian

1319

Malay

1919

Siswati

1320

Maltese

1920

Sesotho

1325

Burmese

1921

Sundanese

1401

Nauru

1923

Swahili

1405

Nepali

2001

Tamil

1415

Norwegian

2005

Telugu

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
229

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

Code

Language

2007

Tajik

2008

Thai

2009

Tigrinya

2011

Turkmen

2012

Tagalog

2014

Setswana

2015

Tongan

2018

Turkish

2019

Tsonga

2020

Tatar

2023

Twi

2111

Ukrainian

2118

Urdu

2126

Uzbek

2209

Vietnamese

2215

Volapük

2315

Wolof

2408

Xhosa

2515

Yoruba

2621

Zulu

IF THE PLAYER
MALFUNCTIONS
If the player or another unit equipped
with the player malfunctions, the audio/
video system will display a message.
These are described below.
If “Check DISC” appears on the screen:
It indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged,
or it was inserted upside down. Clean the
disc or insert it correctly. If a disc which is
not playable is inserted, “Check DISC” will
also appear on the screen. For appropriate
discs for the player, see “AUDIO/VIDEO
SYSTEM OPERATING HINTS” on page
254.
If “Region code error” appears on the
screen: It indicates that the DVD region
code is not set properly.
If the malfunction is not rectified: Take
your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
INFORMATION

● If an MP3/WMA disc contains CD-DA
files only, the CD-DA files can be played.
If an MP3/WMA disc contains CD-DA
files and files other than CD-DA files,
only MP3/WMA files can be played.

230

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

DVD PLAYER AND DVD
VIDEO DISC INFORMATION
DVD VIDEO DISCS
This DVD player conforms to NTSC/
PAL color TV formats. DVD video discs
conforming to another format such as
SECAM cannot be used.
Region codes: Some DVD video discs
have a region code indicating which countries the DVD video disc can be played in
on this DVD player. If the DVD video disc
is not labeled as “ALL” or “1”, you cannot
use it on this DVD player. If you attempt to
play an inappropriate DVD video disc on
this player, “Region code error” appears
on the screen. Even if the DVD video disc
does not have a region code, there are
cases when it cannot be used.

■MARKS SHOWN ON DVD VIDEO
DISCS

NTSC/PAL

Indicates NTSC/PAL
format of color TV.
Indicates the number
of audio tracks.

Indicates the number
of language subtitles.
Indicates the number
of angles.
Indicates the screen
to be selected.
Wide screen: 16:9
Standard: 4:3

231

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

Indicates a region
code by which this video disc can be played.
ALL: in all countries
Number: region code

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

DVD VIDEO DISC GLOSSARY
DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Disc
that holds video. DVD video discs have
adopted “MPEG2”, one of the world standards of digital compression technologies.
The picture data is compressed by 1/40 on
average and stored. Variable rate encoded
technology in which the volume of data assigned to the picture is changed depending on the picture format has also been
adopted. Audio data is stored using PCM
and Dolby Digital, which enables higher
quality of sound. Furthermore, multi-angle
and multi-language features will also help
users enjoy the more advanced technology of DVD video.
Viewer restrictions: This feature limits
what can be viewed in conformity with a
level of restrictions of the country. The level of restrictions varies depending on the
DVD video disc. Some DVD video discs
cannot be played at all, or violent scenes
are skipped or replaced with other scenes.
• Level 1: DVD video discs for children
can be played.
• Level 2 - 7: DVD video discs for children
and G-rated movie can be played.
• Level 8: All types of the DVD video discs
can be played.

Multi-angle feature: The same scene can
be enjoyed from different angles.
Multi-language feature: The subtitle and
audio language can be selected.
Region codes: The region codes are provided on DVD players and DVD discs. If
the DVD video disc does not have the
same region code as the DVD player, you
cannot play the disc on the DVD player.
For region codes, see page 231.
Audio: This DVD player can play liner
PCM, Dolby Digital and MPEG audio format DVDs. Other decoded types cannot
be played.
Title and chapter: Video and audio programs stored in DVD video discs are divided into parts by title and chapter.
Title: The largest unit of the video and audio programs stored on DVD video discs.
Usually, one movie, one album, or one audio program is assigned as a title.
Chapter: A unit smaller than that of title. A
title comprises of several chapters.
 Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
 This Item Incorporates copy protection
technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property
rights of Rovi Corporation. Reverse
engineering and disassembly are prohibited.

232

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

8. USB MEMORY OPERATION
Connecting a USB memory enables
users to enjoy music from the vehicle
speakers.

CAUTION

CONNECTING A USB
MEMORY

Open the cover and connect a USB
memory.

● Do not operate the player’s controls or
connect the USB memory while driving.

NOTICE
● Do not leave your portable player in the
car. In particular, high temperatures
inside the vehicle may damage the portable player.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable player
while it is connected as this may damage the portable player or its terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port
as this may damage the portable player
or its terminal.

 Turn on the power of the USB memory if it
is not turned on.

Press the “MEDIA” button.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
233

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

PLAYING A USB MEMORY
PLAYING AND PAUSING A USB
MEMORY

If a USB memory has already been
connected, touch the “USB” tab to select USB mode. Pressing the “MEDIA”
button repeatedly can also select the
tab.

Tag mode

Folder mode

: Touch to start playing the music.
: Touch to pause the music.
 To start playing the music again, touch
.
INFORMATION

● When the USB memory is connected
and the audio source is changed to USB
memory mode, the USB memory will
start playing the first file in the first
folder. If the same device is removed
and reinserted (and the contents have
not been changed), the USB memory
will resume playing from the same point
it was last used.
● Depending on the USB memory that is
connected to the system, certain functions may not be available.

SELECTING A DESIRED
FOLDER/ALBUM

■ON THE USB TOP SCREEN

INFORMATION

● If tag information exists, the file/folder
names will be changed to track/album
names.

, : Touch to skip to the next or previous folder/album.

234

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

SELECTING A DESIRED
FOLDER, ARTIST OR ALBUM

Touch the folder/album name screen
button.

Touch the desired tab and select the
desired folder, artist or album.

SELECTING A DESIRED FILE/
TRACK

■ON THE USB TOP SCREEN

“SEEK/TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or
“ ” button of “SEEK/TRACK” repeatedly
until the desired file/track number appears
on the screen. The player will start playing
the selected file/track from the beginning.
“TUNE SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to skip to
the desired file/track.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

 Character screen buttons, “ABC”, “DEF”
etc., allow a direct jump to list entries that
begin with the same letter as the character
button.
Each time the same character screen button is touched, the list starting with the
subsequent character is displayed.

, : Touch to move the list up or down
by 5 folder/artist/album groups. If either of
these screen buttons is touched when the
top/bottom page of the list is displayed, the
last/first page is displayed.
, : If
appears to the right of an item
name, the complete name is too long for
the screen. Touch
to scroll to the end of
the name. Touch
to move to the beginning of the name.

235

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

■ON THE FILE/TRACK LIST SCREEN

Touch the file/track name screen button to display the following file/track list
screen.

Touch the desired file/track number.
The player will start playing the selected file/track from the beginning.
,

: Touch to move the list up or down
by 5 file/track groups. If either of these
screen buttons is touched when the top/
bottom page of the list is displayed, the
last/first page is displayed.

■FAST FORWARDING OR REWINDING

Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button
of “SEEK/TRACK” to fast forward or
rewind the file/track.

 When the button is released, the player
resumes playing from that position.

“SEEK/TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or
“ ” button of “SEEK/TRACK” to scroll
through the file/track list one by one.
“TUNE SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly
scroll up or down the file/track list. To select the desired file/track, press the knob.
, : If
appears to the right of an item
name, the complete name is too long for
the screen. Touch
to scroll to the end of
the name. Touch
to move to the beginning of the name.

236

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

REPEATING

RANDOM ORDER

The file or folder currently being listened to can be repeated.

■REPEATING A FILE/TRACK

Touch “RPT” while the file or track is
playing.

 Each time “RPT” is touched, the mode
changes as follows:

When “RAND” is off



Folder/Album

When “RAND” is on
• File/Track Repeat  Off
 “RPT” appears on the screen. When the
file/track is finished, the player will automatically play it again. To cancel this function, touch “RPT” repeatedly until the
repeat mode turns off.

■REPEATING A FOLDER/ALBUM

Touch
“RPT”
repeatedly
until
“FLD.RPT” appears on the screen.

 When the folder/album is finished, the
player will automatically go back to the
beginning of the folder/album and play it
again. To cancel this function, touch
“RPT” again.

■PLAYING FILES/TRACKS IN RANDOM ORDER

Touch “RAND” while the file or track is
playing.

 Each time “RAND” is touched, the mode
changes as follows:
• Random (1 Folder/Album Random) 
Folder/Album Random (All Folder/Album
Random)  Off
 Once “RAND” appears on the screen, the
system selects a file/track randomly from
the folder/album currently being listened
to. To cancel this function, touch “RAND”
repeatedly until the random mode turns
off.

■ALL FOLDER/ALBUM RANDOM
PLAY

Touch “RAND” repeatedly until
“FLD.RAND” appears on the screen.

 Once “FLD.RAND”/“ALB.RAND” appears
on the screen, the system selects a file
randomly from all of the existing folders or
albums. To cancel this function, touch
“RAND” again.

237

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

• File/Track Repeat
Repeat  Off

Files or folders can be automatically
and randomly selected.

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

9. iPod OPERATION
Connecting an iPod enables users to
enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.

CAUTION

CONNECTING iPod

Open the cover and connect iPod using an iPod cable.

● Do not operate the player’s controls or
connect the iPod while driving.

 Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not
turned on.

Press the “MEDIA” button.

PLAYING iPod
PLAYING AND PAUSING iPod

INFORMATION

● When an iPod is connected using a genuine iPod cable, the iPod starts charging
its battery.

If an iPod has already been connected,
touch the “iPod” tab to display the
screen. Pressing the “MEDIA” button
repeatedly can also select the tab.
: Touch to start playing the music.
: Touch to pause the music.

 To start playing the music again, touch
.

238

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

INFORMATION

● When the iPod connected to the system
includes iPod video, the system can only
output the sound by touching “Video”
on the “iPod” screen.
● Depending on the iPod, the video sound
may not be able to be heard.
● Depending on the iPod and the songs in
the iPod, iPod cover art may be displayed. This function can be changed to
“On” or “Off”. See “iPod SETTINGS”
on page 265. It may take time to display
iPod cover art, and the iPod may not be
operated while the cover art display is in
process. Only the iPod cover art that is
saved in JPEG format can be displayed.
● When an iPod is connected and the
audio source is changed to iPod mode,
the iPod will resume playing from the
same point it was last used.
● Depending on the iPod that is connected
to the system, certain functions may not
be available.

Touch “Browse”.

Select the desired play mode.

SELECTING A DESIRED
TRACK

■ON THE iPod TOP SCREEN

239

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

SELECTING A PLAY MODE

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

■ON THE TRACK LIST SCREEN

Touch the track name screen button to
display the following track list screen.

Touch the desired track number. The
player will start playing the selected
track from the beginning.

■FAST FORWARDING OR REWINDING

Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button
of “SEEK/TRACK” to fast forward or
rewind the player.

, : Touch to move the list up or down
by 5 track groups. If either of these screen
buttons is touched when the top/bottom
page of the list is displayed, the last/first
page is displayed.

 When the button is released, the player
resumes playing from that position.

“SEEK/TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or
“ ” button of “SEEK/TRACK” to scroll
through the track list one by one.
“TUNE SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly
scroll up or down the track list. To select
the desired track, press the knob.

The track currently being listened to
can be repeated.

REPEATING

Touch “RPT” while the track is playing.

240

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

RANDOM ORDER
Tracks or albums can be automatically
and randomly selected.

■PLAYING TRACKS IN RANDOM
ORDER

Touch “RAND” while the track is playing.

 Each time “RAND” is touched, the mode
changes as follows:
• Track Shuffle  Album Shuffle  Off
 Once “RAND” appears on the screen, the
system selects a track randomly from all
of the existing albums on the iPod. To cancel this function, touch “RAND” twice.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

■PLAYING ALBUMS IN RANDOM
ORDER

Touch “RAND” repeatedly until
“ALB.RAND” appears on the screen.

 Once “ALB.RAND” appears on the
screen, the system selects an album randomly from all of the existing albums on
the iPod. To cancel this function, touch
“RAND” again.

241

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

10. Bluetooth® AUDIO OPERATION
The Bluetooth® audio system enables
users to enjoy listening to music that is
played on a portable player on the vehicle speakers via wireless communication.
This
audio
system
supports
®, a wireless data system
Bluetooth
capable of playing portable audio
music without cables. If your portable
player does not support Bluetooth®,
the Bluetooth® audio system will not
function.

CAUTION
● Do not operate the player’s controls or
connect to the Bluetooth® audio system
while driving.
● Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth®
antennas. People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should
maintain a reasonable distance between
themselves and the Bluetooth® antennas. The radio waves may affect the
operation of such devices.
● Before using Bluetooth® devices, users
of any electrical medical device other
than
implanted
pacemakers
and
implanted cardiac defibrillators should
consult the manufacturer of the device
for information about its operation under
the influence of radio waves. Radio
waves could have unexpected effects on
the operation of such medical devices.

NOTICE
● Do not leave your portable player in the
vehicle. In particular, high temperatures
inside the vehicle may damage the portable player.

Bluetooth is a trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

242

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

INFORMATION

The quality of the Bluetooth® connection
is indicated as follows:

: An
excellent
Bluetooth®.

connection

: Indicates a bad connection to
Bluetooth®, resulting in possible
deterioration of audio quality.
: No connection to Bluetooth®.

Indicates the amount of battery charge
left.

Empty

Full

243

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

● In the following conditions, the system
may not function:
• The portable player is turned off.
• The portable player is not connected.
• The portable player has a low battery.
● It may take time to connect the phone
when Bluetooth® audio is being played.
● Portable players must correspond to the
following specifications in order to be
connected to the Bluetooth® audio system. However, some functions may be
limited depending on the type of portable player. Also, the different screen is
displayed depending on which portable
player is connecting.
• Bluetooth® Specification
Ver.1.1 or higher
(Recommended: Ver.2.1 + EDR or
higher)
• Profile
A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile) Ver.1.0 or higher
(Recommended: Ver.1.2 or higher)
AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control
Profile) Ver.1.0 or higher
(Recommended: Ver.1.4 or higher)
● Refer
to
http://www.Toyota.com/
Bluetooth/ to find approved Bluetooth®
devices for this system.

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

INFORMATION

● Remaining charge is not displayed while
the Bluetooth® device is connecting.
● The amount of charge left does not
always correspond correctly with your
portable player.
● This system does not have a charging
function.
● An antenna for Bluetooth® connection is
built into the instrument panel. The condition of the Bluetooth® connection may
not be good and the system may not
function when using a Bluetooth® portable player in the following conditions:
• The portable player is obstructed by
certain objects (behind a seat or in the
glove box or console box).
• The portable player touches or is covered with metal materials.
● Leave the Bluetooth® portable player in
a place where the condition of
Bluetooth® connection is good.
 Portable player information is registered
when the portable player is connected
to the Bluetooth® audio system. When
selling or disposing of the vehicle,
remove the Bluetooth® audio information from the system. (See “DELETING
A Bluetooth® DEVICE” on page 179.)

U.S.A.
 FCC ID : HYQDNNS059
Type : DNNS059
IC : 1551A-DNNS059 Canada 310
 This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any
interference
received,
including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.

244

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

Canada

CAUTION

● Co-location: This transmitter must not be
co-located or operated in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter.
Co-implantation: cet émetteur ne doit
pas être co-implanté ou actionné en
même temps qu’aucune autre antenne
ou émetteur.

CONNECTING A Bluetooth®
AUDIO PLAYER
To use the Bluetooth® audio system, it
is necessary to register a portable
player with the system. Once the portable player has been registered, it is
possible to listen to the music.
Once the portable player has been registered, it is possible to listen to music
through the navigation system. (See
“REGISTERING A Bluetooth® DEVICE” on page 178.)
INFORMATION

● For operating the portable player, see
the instruction manual that comes with
it.

WHEN “Bluetooth* Power” IS
ON
 The portable player will be automatically
connected under the following conditions:
• The “POWER” switch is in either
ACCESSORY or ON mode.
• When “Bluetooth* Power” is switched
from off to on.
• When the portable player is disconnected for some reason.

245

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

● NOTE
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions; (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée
seulement
aux
deux
conditions
suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif
doit être prêt à accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique reçu, même si ce
brouillage
est
susceptible
de
compromettre le fonctionnement du
dispositif.
● This equipment complies with IC
radiation exposure limits set forth for
uncontrolled environment and meets
RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure rules. This equipment has
very low levels of RF energy that it
deemed to comply without maximum
permissive exposure evaluation (MPE).
But it is desirable that it should be
installed and operated with at least 20
cm and more between the radiator and
person’s body (excluding extremities:
hands,wrists, feet and ankles).
Cet équipement se conforme aux limites
d’exposition aux radiations établies par
Industrie
Canada
pour
un
environnement non contrôlé ainsi qu’aux
directives d’exposition aux fréquences
radioélectriques (RF) émises par
Industrie Canada dans la norme
CNR-102. Cet équipement émet un
niveau d’énergie RF faible à un point tel
qu’il se conforme sans devoir effectuer
d’évaluation d’exposition maximum
admissible (MPE). Lorsque l’équipement
est utilisé, il est toutefois souhaitable de
laisser au moins 20 cm entre l’antenne
et le corps (à l’exception des
extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et
chevilles).

CAUTION

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

WHEN “Bluetooth* Power” IS
OFF
Manually connect the portable player
in accordance with the following procedure.

Touch “Connect”.

Touch the desired portable player.

INFORMATION

● Touching “Connect Portable Player”
on the “Bluetooth*” screen also connects
a Bluetooth® audio player. (See page
183.)
● When none of the selectable portable
players have been registered, a screen
confirming registration is displayed.
Registration method is the same as
phone registration. (See page 137.)
● When the currently connected portable
player is selected, a screen confirming
the selected player’s disconnection is
displayed. (See page 184.)
● If connection fails once, a changing connection method confirmation screen is
displayed. If connection fails 2 or more
times, a message will be displayed.
When this message is displayed, try
again.

RECONNECTING THE
PORTABLE PLAYER

When the connection is completed,
this screen is displayed. It is now possible to use the portable player.

If the portable player is disconnected
due to poor reception from the
network
when
the
Bluetooth®
“POWER” switch is in ACCESSORY or
ON mode, the system automatically
reconnects the portable player.
 If the Bluetooth® device is disconnected
on purpose, such as it was turned off, this
does not happen. Reconnect the portable
player manually.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

246

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

PLAYING Bluetooth® AUDIO
PLAYING AND PAUSING
Bluetooth® AUDIO

SELECTING A DESIRED
TRACK/FOLDER/ALBUM

■ON THE AUDIO TOP SCREEN

If a Bluetooth® audio player has already been connected, touch the “BT
Audio” tab to display the screen.
Pressing the “MEDIA” button repeatedly can also select the tab.
, : Touch to skip to the next or previous album.

■ON THE PLAYLIST SCREEN

Touch the album name screen button
to display the following playlist screen.

: Touch to start playing the music.

: Touch to pause the music.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

 If the folder name screen button is
touched, the track list screen is displayed.

Touch the desired screen button.

Touch the desired track name screen
button.

247

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

 To start playing the music again, touch
.
 Depending on the portable player that is
connected to the system, the music may
start playing when touching
while it is
paused. Conversely, the music may pause
when touching
while it is playing.

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

: Touch to move the list up or down
by 5 track/folder groups. If either of these
screen buttons is touched when the top/
bottom page of the list is displayed, the
last/first page is displayed.
“SEEK/TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or
“ ” button of “SEEK/TRACK” to scroll
through the track list one by one.
“TUNE SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly
scroll up or down the track/folder list. To
select the desired track/folder, press the
knob.
, : If
appears to the right of an item
name, the complete name is too long for
the screen. Touch
to scroll to the end of
the name. Touch
to move to the beginning of the name.

■FAST FORWARDING OR REWINDING

Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button
of “SEEK/TRACK” to fast forward or
rewind the song.

 When the button is released, the player
resumes playing from that position.
INFORMATION

● Depending on the portable player that is
connected to the system, certain functions may not be available.
● Some titles may not be displayed
depending on the type of portable
player.

248

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

SELECTING A DESIRED
TRACK

■ON THE AUDIO TOP SCREEN

Touch the track name screen button to
display the following track list screen.

Touch the desired track number. The
player will start playing the selected
track from the beginning.

, : Touch to move the list up or down
by 5 track groups. If either of these screen
buttons is touched when the top/bottom
page of the list is displayed, the last/first
page is displayed.
“SEEK/TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or
“ ” button of “SEEK/TRACK” to scroll
through the track list one by one.
“TUNE SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly
scroll up or down the track list. To select
the desired track, press the knob.
, : If
appears to the right of an item
name, the complete name is too long for
the screen. Touch
to scroll to the end of
the name. Touch
to move to the beginning of the name.
INFORMATION

● Depending on the portable player that is
connected to the system, certain functions may not be available.

249

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

■ON THE TRACK LIST SCREEN

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

■FAST FORWARDING OR REWINDING

Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button
of “SEEK/TRACK” to fast forward or
rewind the track.

■REPEATING AN ALBUM

Touch
“RPT”
repeatedly
until
“ALB.RPT” appears on the screen.

 When the album is finished, the player will
automatically go back to the beginning of
the album and play it again. To cancel this
function, touch “RPT” again.

RANDOM ORDER
Tracks or albums can be automatically
and randomly selected.

■PLAYING THE TRACKS ON THE
ALBUM IN RANDOM ORDER

 When the button is released, the player
resumes playing from that position.

Touch “RAND” while the track is playing.

REPEATING
The track or album currently being listened to can be repeated.

■REPEATING A TRACK

Touch “RPT” while the track is playing.

 Each time “RAND” is touched, the mode
changes as follows:
• Album Random  All Track Random 
Off
 Once “RAND” appears on the screen, the
system selects a track randomly from the
album currently being listened to. To cancel this function, touch “RAND” repeatedly until the random mode turns off.

 Each time “RPT” is touched, the mode
changes as follows:
• Track Repeat  Album Repeat  Off
 “RPT” appears on the screen. When the
track is finished, the player will automatically play it again. To cancel this function,
touch “RPT” repeatedly until the repeat
mode turns off.

250

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

■PLAYING TRACKS FROM ALL THE
ALBUMS IN RANDOM ORDER

Touch “RAND” repeatedly until
“ALB.RAND” appears on the screen.

 Once “ALB.RAND” appears on the
screen, the system selects a track
randomly from all of the existing albums
on the Bluetooth® device. To cancel this
function, touch “RAND” again.
INFORMATION

● Depending on the portable player that is
connected to the system, certain functions may not be available.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
251

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

11. AUDIO/VIDEO REMOTE CONTROLS (STEERING SWITCHES)
Some parts of the audio/video system
can be adjusted using the switches on
the steering wheel.

No.

Switch
Volume control switch
“MODE” switch
“

” switch

Volume control switch
 Press the “+” side to increase the volume.
The volume continues to increase while
the switch is being pressed.
 Press the “-” side to decrease the volume. The volume continues to decrease
while the switch is being pressed.
“MODE” switch
 Press the “MODE” switch to select an
audio mode. Each press changes the
mode sequentially if the desired mode is
ready to use.
 To turn the audio/video system on, press
the “MODE” switch.
 Press and hold the “MODE” switch to
mute/unmute or pause/resume the current
operation.

“

” switch

Radio
To select a preset station/channel:
Quickly press and release the “ ” or “ ”
switch. Repeat this to select the next preset station/channel.
To seek a station/channel: Press and
hold the “ ” or “ ” switch until a beep is
heard. Repeat this to find the next station/
channel. If either switch is pressed during
seek mode, seeking will be canceled.
 To seek up or down the frequency, press
and hold the switch until a beep is heard.
When you release the switch, the radio
will begin seeking up or down for a station/
channel. Repeat to find the next station/
channel.

DVD player
 Use the “ ” or “ ” switch to skip up or
down to a different track, file or chapter in
either direction.

To select a desired track, file or chapter:
Quickly press and release the “ ” or “ ”
switch until the desired track, file or chapter to play is selected. To return to the beginning of the current track, file or chapter,
press the “ ” switch once quickly.
To select a desired folder: Press and
hold the “ ” or “ ” switch until a beep is
heard to change to the next or the previous
folder. Repeat it until the desired folder is
selected.

252

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

Bluetooth® audio player
 Use the “ ” or “ ” switch to skip up or
down to a different track or album in either
direction.

To select a desired track: Quickly press
and release the “ ” or “ ” switch until the
desired track is selected. To return to the
beginning of the current track, press the
“ ” switch once quickly.
To select a desired album: Press and
hold the “ ” or “ ” switch until a beep is
heard to change to the next or the previous
album. Repeat it until the desired album is
selected.
USB memory/iPod
 Use the “ ” or “ ” switch to skip up or
down to a different file or track in either
direction.

To select a desired file or track: Press
the “ ” or “ ” switch until the desired file
or track is selected. To return to the beginning of the current file or track, press the
“ ” switch once quickly.
To select a desired folder or album
(USB memory only): Press and hold the
“ ” or “ ” switch until a beep is heard to
change to the next or the previous folder or
album. Repeat it until the desired folder or
album is selected.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
253

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

12. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATING HINTS
NOTICE
● To ensure correct audio/video system
operations:
• Be careful not to spill beverages over
the audio/video system.
• Do not put anything other than an
appropriate disc into the disc slot.
• The use of a cellular phone inside or
near the vehicle may cause a noise
from the speakers of the audio/video
system which you are listening to.
However, this does not indicate a
malfunction.

RADIO RECEPTION
Usually, a problem with radio reception
does not mean there is a problem with
the radio — it is just the normal result
of conditions outside the vehicle.
For example, nearby buildings and terrain can interfere with FM reception.
Power lines or phone wires can interfere with AM signals. And of course, radio signals have a limited range. The
farther the vehicle is from a station, the
weaker its signal will be. In addition, reception conditions change constantly
as the vehicle moves.

FM
Fading and drifting stations: Generally, the
effective range of FM is about 25 miles (40
km). Once outside this range, you may notice fading and drifting, which increase with
the distance from the radio transmitter.
They are often accompanied by distortion.
Multi-path: FM signals are reflective, making it possible for 2 signals to reach the vehicle’s antenna at the same time. If this
happens, the signals will cancel each other
out, causing a momentary flutter or loss of
reception.
Static and fluttering: These occur when
signals are blocked by buildings, trees or
other large objects. Increasing the bass
level may reduce static and fluttering.
Station swapping: If the FM signal being
listened to is interrupted or weakened, and
there is another strong station nearby on
the FM band, the radio may tune in the
second station until the original signal can
be picked up again.

Here, some common reception problems that probably do not indicate a
problem with the radio are described.

254

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AM
Fading: AM broadcasts are reflected by
the upper atmosphere — especially at
night. These reflected signals can interfere
with those received directly from the radio
station, causing the radio station to sound
alternately strong and weak.
Station interference: When a reflected signal and a signal received directly from a radio station are very nearly the same
frequency, they can interfere with each
other, making it difficult to hear the broadcast.
Static: AM is easily affected by external
sources of electrical noise, such as high
tension power lines, lightening or electrical
motors. This results in static.

 “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone”
mean that an electronic accessory has
been designed to connect specifically to
iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has
been certified by the developer to meet
Apple performance standards.
 Apple is not responsible for the operation
of this device or its compliance with safety
and regulatory standards. Please note
that the use of this accessory with iPod or
iPhone may affect wireless performance.
 iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano and
iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

 Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier,
especially metal objects, may adversely
affect the reception of XM Satellite Radio.
 Alternation or modifications carried out
without appropriate authorization may
invalidate the user’s right to operate the
equipment.

iPod

255

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

COMPATIBLE MODELS
The following iPod®, iPod nano®, iPod
classic®, iPod touch® and iPhone® devices can be used with this system.
Made for
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

iPod touch (4th generation)
iPod touch (3rd generation)
iPod touch (2nd generation)
iPod touch (1st generation)
iPod classic
iPod with video
iPod nano (6th generation)
iPod nano (5th generation)
iPod nano (4th generation)
iPod nano (3rd generation)
iPod nano (2nd generation)
iPod nano (1st generation)
iPhone 4
iPhone 3GS
iPhone 3G
iPhone

Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some models
might be incompatible with this system.

CARING FOR YOUR DVD
PLAYER AND DISC
 This DVD player is intended for use with
4.7 in. (12 cm) discs only.
 Extremely high temperatures can keep the
DVD player from working. On hot days,
use the air conditioning system to cool the
inside of the vehicle before using the
player.
 Bumpy roads or other vibrations may
make the DVD player skip.
 If moisture gets into the DVD player, the
discs may not be able to be played.
Remove the discs from the player and
wait until it dries.

CAUTION
● DVD players use an invisible laser beam
which could cause hazardous radiation
exposure if directed outside the unit. Be
sure to operate the player correctly.

USB MEMORY
 USB memory that can be used for MP3
and WMA playback:
• USB communication formats: USB 2.0
HS (480 Mbps) and FS (12 Mbps)
• File formats: FAT 16/32
• Correspondence class: Mass storage
class

256

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

DVD PLAYER

Transparent/translucent discs

Audio CDs

DVD video
discs

Low quality discs

 Use only discs marked as shown above.
The following products may not be playable on your player:
• SACD
• dts CD
• Copy-protected CD
• DVD audio
• Video CD
• DVD+R
• DVD+RW
• DVD-RAM

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

Special shaped discs

Labeled discs

257

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

NOTICE
● Do not use special shaped, transparent/
translucent, low quality or labeled discs
such as those shown in the illustrations.
The use of such discs may damage the
player, or it may be impossible to eject
the disc.
● This system is not designed for use of
Dual Discs. Do not use Dual Discs
because they may cause damage to the
player.
● Do not use discs with a protection ring.
The use of such discs may damage the
player, or it may be impossible to eject
the disc.

To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lintfree cloth that has been dampened with
water. Wipe in a straight line from the center to the edge of the disc (not in circles).
Dry it with another soft, lint-free cloth. Do
not use a conventional record cleaner or
anti-static device.

MP3/WMA FILES

Correct

Wrong

 Handle discs carefully, especially when
inserting them. Hold them on the edge
and do not bend them. Avoid getting fingerprints on them, particularly on the shiny
side.
 Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes or other
disc damage could cause the player to
skip or to repeat a section of a track. (To
see a pin hole, hold the disc up to the
light.)
 Remove discs from the players when not
in use. Store them in their plastic cases
away from moisture, heat and direct sunlight.

 MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) and WMA
(Windows Media Audio) are audio compression standards.
 The MP3/WMA player can play MP3 and
WMA files on CD-ROM, CD-R and CDRW discs.
 The unit can play disc recordings compatible with ISO 9660 level 1 and level 2 and
with the Romeo and Joliet file system.
 When naming an MP3 or WMA file, add
the appropriate file extension (.mp3 or
.wma).
 The MP3/WMA player plays back files
with .mp3 or .wma file extensions as MP3
or WMA files. To prevent noise and playback errors, use the appropriate file extensions.
 The MP3/WMA player can play only the
first session when using multi-session
compatible CDs.

258

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

 MP3 player: MP3 files are compatible with
the ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2 and
Ver. 2.3 formats. The unit cannot display
disc title, track title and artist name in
other formats.
 USB memory: MP3 files are compatible
with the ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver.
2.2, Ver. 2.3 and Ver. 2.4 formats. The unit
cannot display track title and artist name
in other formats.
 WMA files can contain a WMA tag that is
used in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMA
tags carry information such as track title
and artist name.
 The emphasis function is available only
when playing MP3/WMA files recorded at
32, 44.1 and 48 kHz.

SAMPLING FREQUENCY

 MP3 files for MP3 player:
MPEG1 LAYER3 — 32 to 320 kbps
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3 — 8 to 160 kbps
MP3 files for USB memory:
MPEG 1 AUDIO LAYER 3 — 32 to 320
kbps
MPEG 2 AUDIO LAYER 3 — 8 to 160
kbps
WMA files for WMA player:
Ver. 7, 8 CBR — 48 to 192 kbps
Ver. 9 (9.1/9.2) CBR — 48 to 320 kbps
(VBR*)
WMA files for USB memory:
Ver. 9 (9.1/9.2) CBR — 48 to 320 kbps
(VBR*)
*: Variable Bit Rate
 The MP3/WMA player does not play back
MP3/WMA files from discs recorded using
packet write data transfer (UDF format).
Discs should be recorded using “pre-mastering” software rather than packet-write
software.
 M3u playlists are not compatible with the
audio player.
 MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO formats are not compatible with the audio
player.
 The player is compatible with VBR (Variable Bit Rate).
 When playing back files recorded as VBR
(Variable Bit Rate) files, the play time will
not be correctly displayed if the fast forward or reverse operations are used.
 It is not possible to check folders that do
not include MP3/WMA files.
 MP3/WMA files in folders up to 8 levels
deep can be played. However, the start of
playback may be delayed when using
discs containing numerous levels of folders. For this reason, we recommend creating discs with no more than 2 levels of
folders.

259

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

 MP3 files for MP3 player:
MPEG 1 LAYER 3 — 32, 44.1, 48 kHz
MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3 — 16, 22.05, 24
kHz
MP3 files for USB memory:
MPEG 1 AUDIO LAYER 2, 3 — 32, 44.1,
48 kHz
MPEG 2 AUDIO LAYER 2, 3 — 16, 22.05,
24 kHz
WMA files for WMA player:
Ver. 7, 8, 9 (9.1/9.2) CBR — 32, 44.1, 48
kHz
WMA files for USB memory:
Ver. 7, 8, 9 (9.1/9.2) CBR — 32, 44.1, 48
kHz
 The sound quality of MP3/WMA files generally improves with higher bit rates. In
order to achieve a reasonable level of
sound quality, discs recorded with a bit
rate of at least 128 kbps are recommended.

PLAYABLE BIT RATES

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

001.mp3
002.wma
Folder 1
003.mp3
Folder 2
004.mp3
005.wma
Folder 3
006.mp3

 The play order of the compact disc with
the structure shown above is as follows:
001.mp3

002.wma . . .

006.mp3

 CD-R/CD-RW discs may be damaged by
direct exposure to sunlight, high temperatures or other storage conditions. The unit
may be unable to play some damaged
discs.
 If you insert a CD-RW disc into the MP3/
WMA player, playback will begin more
slowly than with a conventional CD or CDR disc.
 Recordings on CD-R/CD-RW cannot be
played using the DDCD (Double Density
CD) system.

TERMS
PACKET WRITE

 MP3/WMA player: It is possible to play up
to 192 folders or 255 files on one disc.
 USB memory: It is possible to play up to
3000 folders, 255 files per folder or 9999
files in the device.
 The order changes depending on the personal computer and MP3/WMA encoding
software you use.

CD-R AND CD-RW DISCS
 CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not been
subject to the “finalizing process” (a process that allows discs to be played on a
conventional CD player) cannot be
played.
 It may not be possible to play CD-R/CDRW discs recorded on a music CD
recorder or a personal computer because
of disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on
the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the
lens of the unit.
 It may not be possible to play discs
recorded on a personal computer depending on the application settings and the
environment. Record with the correct format. (For details, contact the appropriate
application manufacturers of the applications.)

 This is a general term that describes the
process of writing data on-demand to CDR, etc., in the same way that data is written to floppy or hard discs.

ID3 TAG
 This is a method of embedding trackrelated information in an MP3 file. This
embedded information can include the
track title, the artist’s name, the album
title, the music genre, the year of production, comments and other data. The contents can be freely edited using software
with ID3 tag editing functions. Although
the tags are restricted to a number of
characters, the information can be viewed
when the track is played back.

WMA TAG
 WMA files can contain a WMA tag that is
used in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMA
tags carry information such as track title
and artist name.

260

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ISO 9660 FORMAT
 This is the international standard for the
formatting of CD-ROM folders and files.
For the ISO 9660 format, there are 2 levels of regulations.
 Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (8
character file names, with a 3 character
file extension. File names must be composed of one-byte capital letters and numbers. The “_” symbol may also be
included.)
 Level 2: The file name can have up to 31
characters (including the separation mark
“.” and file extension). Each folder must
contain fewer than 8 hierarchies.

m3u
 Playlists created using “WINAMP” software have a playlist file extension (.m3u).

MP3

 CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000 to
present Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000 to present
Gracenote. One or more patents owned
by Gracenote apply to this product and
service. See the Gracenote website for
a non-exhaustive list of applicable
Gracenote patents. Gracenote, CDDB,
MusicID, MediaVOCS, the Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the “Powered by
Gracenote” logo are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote
in the United States and/or other countries.

WMA
 WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an audio
compression
format
developed
by
Microsoft®. It compresses files into a size
smaller than that of MP3 files. The decoding formats for WMA files are Ver. 7, 8 and
9.

261

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

 MP3 is an audio compression standard
determined by a working group (MPEG) of
the ISO (International Standard Organization). MP3 compresses audio data to
about 1/10 the size of that on conventional
discs.

 Music recognition technology and
related
data
are
provided
by
Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry
standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For
more
information
visit
www.gracenote.com.

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

 Gracenote® End User License Agreement

This application or device contains
software from Gracenote, Inc. of
Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”).
The software from Gracenote (the
“Gracenote Software”) enables this
application to perform disc and/or file
identification and obtain music-related
information, including name, artist,
track,
and
title
information
(“Gracenote Data”) from online servers or embedded databases (collectively, “Gracenote Servers”) and to
perform other functions. You may use
Gracenote Data only by means of the
intended End-User functions of this
application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-commercial use only. You
agree not to assign, copy, transfer or
transmit the Gracenote Software or
any Gracenote Data to any third party.
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE
GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE,
OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT
AS
EXPRESSLY
PERMITTED
HEREIN.

You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers will terminate if you violate
these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote Servers,
including all ownership rights. Under
no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for
any information that you provide. You
agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agreement
against you directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique
identifier to track queries for statistical
purposes. The purpose of a randomly
assigned numeric identifier is to allow
the Gracenote service to count queries without knowing anything about
who you are. For more information,
see the web page for the Gracenote
Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service.

262

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

GRACENOTE
DISCLAIMS
ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE
OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO
CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL
OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR
FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST
REVENUES.
copyright ©
Gracenote

2000

present

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

The Gracenote Software and each
item of Gracenote Data are licensed to
you “AS IS.” Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or
implied, regarding the accuracy of any
Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote
Servers. Gracenote reserves the right
to delete data from the Gracenote
Servers or to change data categories
for any cause that Gracenote deems
sufficient. No warranty is made that
the Gracenote Software or Gracenote
Servers are error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or
Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or
additional data types or categories
that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any time.

263

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

1. AUDIO SETTINGS
HD Radio™ SYSTEM
SETTINGS

Touch “HD Radio/Analog Setting”.

Touch the item to be set.

HD Radio™ system can be set using
the procedure outlined below.

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Audio”.
Screen button

Function

“All”

Touch to receive both analog and digital broadcasts.

“HD Only”

Touch to receive only digital broadcasts.

“Analog”

Touch to receive only analog broadcasts.

Touch “HD Radio Settings”.

Touch “Save”.

264

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

iPod SETTINGS

Touch “iPod Settings”.

Touch “Display Cover Art”.

Touch “On” or “Off”.

iPod can be set using the procedure
outlined below.
COVER ART DISPLAY
SETTINGS
When the track currently being played
has cover art data, it can be displayed.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Audio”.

265

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. SETUP

266

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

6
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
1

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
OPERATION

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM ...... 268
STEERING SWITCHES FOR
THE VOICE COMMAND
SYSTEM............................................ 268
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
OPERATION ..................................... 268

2. NATURAL SPEECH INFORMATION
(ENGLISH ONLY) ..................... 274
3. EXPANDED VOICE
COMMANDS ............................. 276
4. COMMAND LIST ......................... 277

267

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
The voice command system enables
the navigation, audio/video and handsfree systems to be operated using
voice commands.
The operating procedures of voice
commands from the “Shortcut Menu”
screen are explained here.
INFORMATION

● Commands that are not displayed in the
“Shortcut Menu” screen can be operated
from the “Main Menu” screen.

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
OPERATION

Press the talk switch.

 After the “Shortcut Menu” screen has
been displayed, voice guidance will commence.
 Voice guidance for the voice command
system can be skipped by pressing the
talk switch.

After a beep sounds, say the command
of your choice.

STEERING SWITCHES FOR
THE VOICE COMMAND
SYSTEM

Talk switch
 Press the talk switch to start the voice
command system.
 To cancel voice recognition, press and
hold the talk switch.

 Voice commands are marked with
.
Some commonly used commands are displayed on the screen.
 By saying “Next page” or “Previous
page”, or by touching “Next Pg.”/“Prev.
Pg.”, the screen will display the commands displayed on the page in the background.
 Saying “Main menu” or touching “Main
Menu” when the “Shortcut Menu” screen
is displayed will display the “Main Menu”
screen.
 Registered POIs, registered names in the
phonebook etc., can be said in the place
of the “<>” next to the commands. (See
page 277.)
For example: Say “Find nearby dining”,
“Call John” etc.

268

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

 Saying “Help” prompts voice guidance
to offer examples of commands and
operation methods.

Say the command displayed on the
screen.

 If a desired outcome is not shown, or if no
selections are available, perform one of
the following to return to the previous
screen:
• Say “Go back”.
• Touch “Go Back”.
 To cancel voice recognition, touch “Cancel”, or press and hold the talk switch.

INFORMATION

269

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

● If the navigation system does not
respond or the confirmation screen does
not disappear, press the talk switch and
try again.
● If a voice command cannot be recognized within 6 seconds, voice guidance
will say “Pardon?” (“Command not recognized.” will be displayed on the
screen) and voice command reception
will restart.
● If a voice command cannot be recognized 2 consecutive times, the voice
command guidance system will say
“Paused. To restart voice recognition,
push the talk switch. To cancel voice
recognition, push and hold the talk
switch.” Then voice recognition will be
suspended.
● The voice recognition prompt can be set
to on or off when “Voice Prompts” is
touched. This setting can also be
changed on the “Voice Settings” screen.
(See page 52.)
● When “Voice Prompts” is touched,
voice recognition will be temporarily suspended. Press the talk switch again.
● Voice guidance can be canceled by setting voice prompts to off. Use this setting
when it is desirable to say a command
immediately after pressing the talk
switch and hearing a beep.

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

MICROPHONE
It is unnecessary to speak directly into
the microphone when giving a command.
Type A

Type B

INFORMATION

● Wait for the confirmation beep before
speaking a command.
● Voice commands may not be recognized
if:
• Spoken too quickly.
• Spoken at a low or high volume.
• The roof or windows are open.
• Passengers are talking while voice
commands are spoken.
• The air conditioning speed is set high.
• The air conditioning vents are turned
towards the microphone.
● In the following conditions, the system
may not recognize the command properly and using voice commands may not
be possible:
• The command is incorrect or unclear.
Note that certain words, accents or
speech patterns may be difficult for the
system to recognize.
• There is excessive background noise,
such as wind noise.

270

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE:
SEARCHING FOR A ROUTE TO
YOUR HOME

1
2

Press the talk switch.
Say “Go home”.

 A confirmation screen will be displayed
showing the recognition results.

Say “Yes” or touch “Yes”.

 The system starts searching for a route to
your home.

 When the voice command is recognized,
the map of the area around the home
address will be displayed and route guidance to the home address will begin.

1
2

Press the talk switch.
Say “Enter an address”.

 If the destination’s state/province has not
been set or is not contained in the voice
command recognition list, the screen to
input a state/province will be displayed.

 Some areas cannot be recognized by the
voice recognition system.
 For information regarding the state/
province setting to perform a destination
search by address, see “SELECTING
THE SEARCH AREA” on page 56.

Say “”.

 Say the desired city name that belongs to
the set state in the place of the “<>”.
 Say “Change State” to change the set
voice recognition state.

271

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

 If a home address is not registered,
voice guidance will say “Your home is
not set. Please try again after setting a
home location.” and you will be
prompted to enter a home address.
(See page 97.)

VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE:
PERFORMING A DESTINATION
SEARCH BY ADDRESS
(ENGLISH ONLY)

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

Say “”.

 Say the desired full street name, or main
body of the street name that belongs to
the set state in the place of the “<>”.
 The voice command recognition is
designed to recognize the main body of
the official street name.

For example, if the official street name is
“East Main Street”, the voice command
recognition will recognize “Main”.

Say “”.

 Say the desired number, cardinal/intercardinal direction etc. in the place of the “<>”.

For example: Say “West 555”.
 Inputting the house number can be
skipped.

Say “Start guidance” or “Show
map”. Alternatively, touch “Start
Guidance” or “Show Map”.

 After this, follow the voice guidance and
search for a destination route by voice
command operation.

INFORMATION

● Even if the state set using voice recognition is different from the set state in the
“Address” screen (which was set when a
destination was set manually), the set
state in the “Address” screen will not
change. (For more information on the
“Address” screen, see “SELECTING
THE SEARCH AREA” on page 56.)
● The house number voice recognition
conditions are outlined below:
• Numerals: 10 digits or less
• Numerals and cardinal/intercardinal
direction or a hyphen and numerals:
A total of 9 digits or less (Do not say
“and”.)
• Cardinal/Intercardinal direction or a
hyphen and numerals: A total of 9
digits or less (Do not say “and”.)
• Numerals are recognized as single
digits only.
• The cardinal/intercardinal direction
and hyphens are only recognized
once.
• The following cardinal/intercardinal
directions can be recognized: North,
East, West, South, North East, North
West, South East and South West.
● When inputting the house number is
skipped and the recognized candidate
list has multiple entries and so forth, the
full street name may need to be recognized. If this occurs, say the full street
name.
For example, say “East Main Street”
and “East Main Street” will be recognized.

272

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE:
SEARCH FOR A TRACK USING
ARTIST NAME OR ALBUM
NAME

Press the talk switch.

 “Play Artist ” and “Play Album
” are displayed in the “Shortcut
Menu” screen.

Say “Play artist ” or “Play album ”.

 Say the desired artist name
name in the place of the “<>”.
 A confirmation screen will be
showing the recognition results.
matching items are found, a
screen will be displayed.

or album
displayed
If multiple
selection

 When “Play Artist ” is used to
play music, the first track is selected
randomly. For operations beyond playing music, refer to the “AUDIO/VIDEO
SYSTEM” section of this manual.

Say “Yes” or touch “Yes”.

INFORMATION

● A USB memory or iPod must be connected to enable track searching and
playback. (See “USB MEMORY OPERATION” on page 233 and “iPod OPERATION” on page 238.)
● When a USB memory or iPod is connected, recognition data is created so
tracks can be searched using voice
commands.
● Recognition data is updated under the
following conditions:
• When the USB memory or iPod data
has changed.
• When the voice recognition language
is changed. (See page 46.)
● While the recognition data is being created or being updated, a track search
cannot be performed using a voice command.
● While “Play Music” is displayed in the
“Shortcut menu” screen, say “Play
music” to display the music screen from
which searching for a track using a voice
command can be performed.
● When “Play Music” is dimmed in the
“Shortcut Menu” screen, it is not possible to search for a track using a voice
command. In this situation, reduce the
amount of music data in the USB memory or iPod and update the recognition
data to enable searching by voice command.

273

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

 The system starts playing music.

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

2. NATURAL SPEECH INFORMATION (ENGLISH ONLY)
Due to natural language speech recognition technology, this system enables
recognition of a command when spoken naturally. However, the system
cannot recognize every variation of
each command. In some situations, it
is possible to omit the command for the
procedure and directly state the desired operation. Not all voice commands are displayed in the short cut
menu.
INFORMATION

● The “Set a Destination”, “Use the
Phone”, “Play Music” and “Get Information” commands displayed on the “Shortcut Menu” screen can be operated using
natural language speech recognition
technology.
● If the command cannot be recognized
completely, the command input screen
will be displayed. (Search results will be
shown based on the part of the command that was recognized.)

EXPRESSION EXAMPLES FOR
EACH FUNCTION
Command

Expression examples

“Go Home”

Let’s go home.
Take me home.

“Enter an Address”

I wanna enter an address, please.
Put in an address.

“Find Nearby
”

Find nearby for me.
I need to see the nearby .

“Call
”

Get
me
.
I need to call at
right away.

“Dial ”

Please dial the number
<3334445555>.
Ring <3334445555>.

“Play Artist
”

Play
the
artist
.
I’d like to hear the band
.*

“Play Album
”

Play album .
Music from album
.*

*: Say the desired artist name or album

name in the place of the “<>”.

274

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

Command

Expression examples

“Traffic”

How’s the traffic?
Check the traffic.

“Weather”

What’s the weather
like?
Let’s get a forecast.

“Sports Scores”

Team scores.
How are my favorite
teams doing?

“Stock Quotes”

Stock quotes.
How are my stocks doing?

“Fuel Prices”

Let’s check fuel prices.
Find the cheapest gas
prices.

INFORMATION

● Commands that are not displayed in the
“Shortcut Menu” screen can be
accessed from the main menu.
● For example, to make an “International
Call”, say “Main menu” while the
“Shortcut Menu” screen is being displayed. Then say “Use the phone” followed by saying the desired number,
e.g. “123456789”.

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
275

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

3. EXPANDED VOICE COMMANDS
Touching “On” next to “Expanded
Voice Commands” on the “Voice Settings” screen enables voice command
operation of the audio/video system.
(See page 52.) For more information
on operations that can be controlled
using expanded voice commands, refer to “COMMAND LIST”. (See page
277.)
VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE:
TURN THE AUDIO SYSTEM ON

1
2

Press the talk switch.
Say “Audio on”.

INFORMATION

● Commands relating to operation of the
audio/video system can only be performed when the audio system is turned
on.
● Expanded voice commands can be recognized when the “Shortcut Menu”
screen is displayed.

276

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

4. COMMAND LIST
Recognizable voice commands and their actions are shown below.
 All commands are listed in the table.
 For devices that are not installed in the vehicle, the related commands will not be displayed in the “Shortcut Menu” screen. Also, according to conditions, other commands
may not be displayed in the “Shortcut Menu” screen.
 The functions available may vary according to the navigation system installed.
 Voice recognition language can be changed. (See “SELECTING A LANGUAGE” on
page 46.)

“Set a Destination”
Action

Shortcut
Menu

“Find Nearby ”

Displays a list of near the
current position.

“Enter an Address”

Enables setting a destination by saying the address.

“Go Home”

Displays the route to home.

“Destination by Phone Number”*2

Enables setting a destination by saying the
phone number.



Command

277

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

*1: For example; Gas stations, Restaurants, etc.
*2: To use this function, say “Main menu” and then “Set a destination” while the
“Shortcut Menu” screen is being displayed.

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

“Use the Phone” (See “BY VOICE RECOGNITION” on page 145.)
Action

Shortcut
Menu

“Call ”

Calls made by saying a name from the phonebook.
For example: Say “Call John Smith”, “Call
John Smith, mobile” etc.

“Dial ”

Calls made by saying the phone number.
For example: Say “Dial 911”, “Dial
5556667777” etc.

“International Call”*1

Calls international numbers by saying the
phone number.



Command

*1: To use this function, say “Main menu” and then “Use the phone” while the “Shortcut
Menu” screen is being displayed.
“Play Music”
Command

Shortcut
Menu

Action

“Play Artist ”

Plays tracks by the selected artist.
For example: Say “Play artist ”*1

“Play Album ”

Plays tracks from the selected album.
For example: Say “Play album ”*1

“Play Song ”*2

Plays the selected track.
For example: Say “Play song Summertime”,
“Play song Concerto in A Major” etc.



“Play Playlist ”*2

Plays tracks from the selected playlist.
For example: Say “Play playlist My Favorite
Songs”, “Play Playlist Classic Hits” etc.



*1: Say the desired artist name or album name in the place of the “<>”.
*2: To use this function, say “Main menu” and then “Play music” while the “Shortcut
menu” screen is being displayed.

278

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

“Get Information”
Command

Shortcut
Menu

Action

“Traffic”

Displays the traffic incident list.

“Weather”

Displays weather information.

“Sports Scores”

Displays the sports list.

“Stock Quotes”

Displays the stocks list.

“Fuel Prices”

Displays the fuel prices list.

Select audio mode

When Expanded Voice Commands are turned “On”. (See page 276.)
Command

Action

Shortcut
Menu

Sets the audio mode to radio.

“AM”

Selects the AM band.

“FM”

Selects the FM band.

“Satellite radio”

Selects the satellite radio mode.

“Disc”

Selects the disc audio mode.

“Auxiliary”

Selects the auxiliary audio mode.

“Bluetooth* audio”

Selects the Bluetooth audio mode.

“iPod”

Selects the iPod audio mode.

“USB audio”

Selects the USB audio mode.

“Audio on”

Turns the audio system on.

“Audio off”

Turns the audio system off.

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

“Radio”

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
INFORMATION

● Commands that have a “O” in the Shortcut Menu column can be recognized from the
“Shortcut Menu” screen.
● Commands that have a “” in the Shortcut Menu column can only be recognized from
the screen that they are displayed in.

279

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

280

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

7
INFORMATION
1

INFORMATION DISPLAY

XM FUNCTION OPERATION

1. FUEL CONSUMPTION ................ 282

1. XM Sports ................................... 286

FUEL CONSUMPTION ....................... 282

RECEIVE SPORTS INFORMATION ... 286

2. MAP DATABASE VERSION
AND COVERAGE AREA........... 283

XM Sports SETTINGS —
ADD OR DELETE TEAMS ................ 287

MAP INFORMATION........................... 283

2. XM Stocks................................... 289

CERTIFICATION ................................. 284

RECEIVE STOCK DATA ..................... 289

XM FUNCTION-OVERVIEW

1. XM SERVICES ............................. 285

XM Stocks SETTINGS —
ADD OR DELETE STOCKS.............. 290

3. XM Fuel Prices ........................... 292

SHOW XM Fuel Prices
INFORMATION ................................. 292
VIEW DETAILED FUEL PRICE
INFORMATION ................................. 292

XM Fuel Prices SETTINGS.................. 293

4. XM NavWeather™ ...................... 295
SHOW XM NavWeather™
INFORMATION ................................. 295
WEATHER INFORMATION ................. 296
WEATHER WARNINGS ...................... 297

XM NavWeather™ INDICATOR .......... 297

5. XM NavTraffic® ........................... 298
SHOW TRAFFIC EVENT..................... 298
SHOW XM NavTraffic®
INFORMATION ................................. 299

SETUP

1. XM SETTINGS............................. 301

281

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. INFORMATION DISPLAY

1. FUEL CONSUMPTION
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Fuel consumption information, such as
that shown below, can be displayed on
the screen. For details see Section 1-1
of “Owner’s Manual”.
 Energy monitor
 Trip information
 Past record

282

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. INFORMATION DISPLAY

2. MAP DATABASE VERSION AND COVERAGE AREA
MAP INFORMATION
Coverage areas and legal information
can be displayed and map data can be
updated.

Press the “INFO/APPS” button.

Touch “Map Data”.

INFORMATION

● Map data updates are available for a
fee. Contact your Toyota dealer for further information.
● The “Map Information” screen displays
“Map Version” and
“Map Update
ID”. This data is needed to perform a
map data update.

LEGAL INFORMATION
Legal information related to the map
data can be displayed.
Press the “INFO/APPS” button.

Touch “Legal Info.”.

Touch “Map Data” on the “Information” screen.

INFORMATION

 The “Map Information” screen will be displayed.

1
2

 The “Legal Information” screen will be displayed.

283

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. INFORMATION DISPLAY

MAP COVERAGE
Map data coverage areas can be displayed.

1
2

Press the “INFO/APPS” button.

Touch “Map Coverage”.

Touch “Map Data” on the “Information” screen.

 The “Map Data Coverage” screen will be
displayed.

CERTIFICATION
For vehicles sold in Canada
 Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device. This Category II
radiocommunication device complies
with Industry Canada Standard RSS310.
 L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée
seulement aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif doit
être prêt à accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le
fonctionnement du dispositif. Ce dispositif de radiocommunication de
catégorie II respecte la norme CNR-310
d’Industrie Canada.

284

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. XM FUNCTION-OVERVIEW

1. XM SERVICES
XM services are subscription-based
XM Satellite Radio services to provide
convenient features to subscribers.
 With an active XM subscription, the following features are available:
• XM Sports*1 (See page 286.)
• XM Stocks*1 (See page 289.)
• XM Fuel Prices*2 (See page 292.)
• XM NavWeather™*2 (See page 295.)
• XM NavTraffic®*2 (See page 298.)

*1: Available at no extra charge with an active XM Satellite Radio subscription.

*2: Available via separate XM subscription(s).

SUBSCRIPTION(S)
 XM NavTraffic®, XM NavWeather™ and
XM TravelLink require separate XM subscription(s). XM Sports*, XM Stocks* and
XM Fuel Prices are available with an XM
TravelLink subscription. After a 90-day
trial, you must contact XM and set up the
appropriate XM subscription(s) to continue
receiving these services.

ACTIVATION OF SERVICE(S)
XM
 To
receive
XM
NavTraffic®,
NavWeather™, XM Sports, XM Stocks
and XM Fuel Prices services, the XM
service must be activated. To activate the
service, call the XM Listener Care Center
at 1-800-967-2346 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-2090079 (Canada).
 Customers should have their radio ID
ready. The radio ID can be found by
selecting “CH 000” on the radio. For
details, see “DISPLAYING THE RADIO
ID” on page 207.
INFORMATION

● For details about the XM service coverage areas, refer to www.siriusxm.com
(U.S.A.) or www.xmradio.ca (Canada),
or call XM Listener Care Center at 1800-967-2346 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-2090079 (Canada).
● For further details about the service,
contact your Toyota dealer.
● XM Satellite Radio is responsible for all
fees and services, which are subject to
change.

*: XM Sports and XM Stocks are included
with an XM Satellite Radio subscription.

INFORMATION

AVAILABILITY OF SERVICE(S)
 The XM NavTraffic® service is available in
the contiguous 48 U.S. states and
Canada.
 The XM NavWeather™, XM Sports, XM
Stocks and XM Fuel Prices services are
available in the contiguous 48 U.S. states.

285

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

1. XM Sports
XM Sports is a service included with an
XM Satellite Radio subscription. This
service is also available with an XM
TravelLink subscription. With this service, you can receive updates via the
navigation system on your personally
selected sports teams.

Press the “INFO/APPS” button.

RECEIVE SPORTS
INFORMATION
The desired teams must be added in
order to receive information. (See
page 287.)

1
2

Press the “INFO/APPS” button.

Touch the desired team to receive information.

Touch “XM Sports” on the “Information” screen.

Touch “XM Sports”.
 Teams for which there is no current data
available will be dimmed and you will not
be able to select them.

Touch the individual information item
to hear it, or touch “Read All” to hear
all available information for that team.

 The “XM Sports” screen is displayed.
 The following operations can be performed:
• Sports information can be received. (See
page 286.)
• XM Sports settings can be set. (See
page 287.)
 The selected information will be read out
in its entirety.

286

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

XM Sports SETTINGS — ADD
OR DELETE TEAMS

ADD SPORTS TEAM

Touch “Add Sports Team”.

To input your personalized XM Sports
team.

1
2

Press the “INFO/APPS” button.

Touch “Options”.

Touch “XM Sports” on the “Information” screen.
 Up to 5 teams can be added and saved in
the system for which information will be
received. The desired teams can be
changed at any time. Teams must be
added one at a time.

Touch the desired sporting league of
the team.

Touch the name of the desired team to
be added from the list that appears.

Touch “Yes” to confirm or “No” to
cancel.

Perform each setting according to the
procedures outlined on the following
pages.

INFORMATION

 Personalized XM Sports teams can also
be input from the “Setup” screen. (See
“XM SETTINGS” on page 301.)

287

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

DELETE SPORTS TEAMS

Touch “Delete Sports Teams”.

Touch the individual sports team to be
deleted or touch “Select All” to delete
all the teams, and touch “Delete”.

Touch “Yes” to confirm or “No” to
cancel.

288

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

2. XM Stocks
XM Stocks is a service included with
an XM Satellite Radio subscription.
This service is also available with an
XM TravelLink subscription. With this
service, you can receive updates via
the navigation system on your personally selected stocks.

Press the “INFO/APPS” button.

Touch “XM Stocks”.

RECEIVE STOCK DATA
You must first add your desired stocks
prior to receiving data. (See page 290.)

1
2

Press the “INFO/APPS” button.

Touch an individual stock to hear its related data, or touch “Read All” to hear
the data for all the stocks saved in the
system.

Touch “XM Stocks” on the “Information” screen.

 The selected data will be read out in its
entirety.
 Stock data may be delayed by approximately 20 minutes.
7

INFORMATION

 The “XM Stocks” screen is displayed.
 The following operations can be performed:
• Stock data can be received. (See page
289.)
• XM Stocks setting can be set. (See page
290.)

289

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

XM Stocks SETTINGS — ADD
OR DELETE STOCKS

ADD STOCK

Touch “Add Stock”.

Input the desired stock symbol.

When finished, touch “OK”.

To input your personalized XM Stocks
settings.

1
2

Press the “INFO/APPS” button.

Touch “Options”.

Perform each setting according to the
procedures outlined on the following
pages.

Touch “XM Stocks” on the “Information” screen.

 Up to 10 individual stock symbols can be
added and saved in the system for which
information will be received. Stocks must
be input one at a time. To enter a stock,
the symbol of the desired stock must be
known.

 Personalized XM Stocks settings can
also be input from the “Setup” screen.
(See “XM SETTINGS” on page 301.)

290

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

DELETE STOCKS

Touch “Delete Stocks”.

Touch the individual stock to be deleted or touch “Select All” to delete all
the stocks, and touch “Delete”.

Touch “Yes” to confirm or “No” to
cancel.
7

INFORMATION
291

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

3. XM Fuel Prices
XM Fuel Prices is a service included
with an XM TravelLink subscription. It
enables the navigation system to display current fuel prices and gas station
locations, which can be set as a destination if desired.

XM Fuel Prices SCREEN

SHOW XM Fuel Prices
INFORMATION

Gas station name

Press the “INFO/APPS” button.

Sort

VIEW DETAILED FUEL PRICE
INFORMATION

1
2
2

Touch “XM Fuel Prices”.

 The “Fuel Price” screen is displayed.

Press the “INFO/APPS” button.
Touch “XM Fuel Prices” on the “Information” screen.
Touch the desired gas station from the
list.

 The location of the selected gas station
will be displayed on the map screen.

292

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

Touch “Info”.

XM Fuel Prices SETTINGS
The desired fuel type, preferred brand,
and show prices reported can be registered.
REGISTER FUEL TYPE

 When the map scale is at the maximum
range of 0.5 miles (800 m),
is not
shown. When the map scale is at the minimum range of 150 ft. (50 m),
is not
shown.

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Other”.

“Mark”: Touch to mark the selected gas
station on the map screen.
7

INFORMATION

“Go to ”: Touch to set the selected
gas station as a destination with route directions.
“Add to Route”: Touch to add the selected gas station as a destination.
“Detail”: Touch to read the selected gas
station’s information.

Touch “XM Fuel Prices”.

 If
is touched, the registered
phone number can be called.
INFORMATION

● The information displayed is received
via satellite radio. Depending on the
time the information is received, the displayed information may not be up to
date.

293

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

Touch “Fuel Type”.

Touch the desired fuel type.

1
2
3

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Show Prices Reported”.

Touch the desired period.

Touch “Other” on the “Setup” screen.
Touch “XM Fuel Prices” on the “Other
Settings” screen.

 “Premium”, “Midgrade”, “Regular” or
“Diesel” can be selected.

Touch “Save”.

1
2
3

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Other” on the “Setup” screen.

Touch “Preferred Brand”.

 “Last 24 Hours”, “Last 2 Days” or
“Show All” can be selected.
 If “Show All” is selected, information
about gas stations which fuel prices are
not provided is also displayed on the
list.

Touch “XM Fuel Prices” on the “Other
Settings” screen.

5
6

Touch “Save”.

Touch the preferred brand.
Touch “Save”.

294

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

4. XM NavWeather™
The
subscription-based
XM
NavWeather™ service allows the navigation system to display weather information on the map screen.
 The following operations can be performed:
• Show XM NavWeather™ information:
Weather forecast information is displayed on the map screen. (See page
295.)
• Weather information: Weather information for the selected city is displayed.
(See page 296.)
• Weather warnings: Weather warnings
issued within a radius of approximately
15 miles (25 km) or 7.8 miles (12.5 km)
around the vehicle are displayed on the
warning screen. (See page 297.)

SHOW XM NavWeather™
INFORMATION

Press the “INFO/APPS” button.

XM NavWeather™ SCREEN

“Info”
 When the city icon is touched, “Info” is
displayed on the map screen. Touching
this screen button displays the “Forecast”
screen. (See page 296.)
City icon
 When this screen button is touched, city
names and “Info” are displayed on the
upper part of the screen.

“Forecast”
 When this screen button is touched, the
city selection screen is displayed.

Touch “XM NavWeather”.

“Current Location”
 When “Current Location” is touched, the
current position is displayed.
Zoom in/out screen button
 The scale of the map can be changed.
Three zoom levels can be selected; 16
miles (26 km), 30 miles (48 km) and 60
miles (97 km).

 The XM NavWeather screen is displayed.

295

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

INFORMATION

• Touch a city to display weather information. Weather information of the selected
city will be displayed. (See page 296.)

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

Weather icons and grids
 Inclement weather information is displayed on the map using weather icons
and grids. Touching an icon shows the
related information at the top of the
screen.
Icon

WEATHER INFORMATION

Weather
Tornado

Hurricane

No.

Function
Received time

Storm

Flood

City name
Today’s date
Current weather

Winter

Wind

Current temperature
Today’s weather
Tomorrow’s weather

Extremes

Other

Hail storm

Day after tomorrow’s weather
Observed time (Time elapsed since
last update)
Specified day’s weather

Severe thunderstorm

Heavy fog

Heavy freezing rain/ice

Heavy snow

Heavy rain
296

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

 When the specified day’s weather screen
button is touched, weather information for
a specified day is displayed.

No.

WEATHER WARNINGS
Weather warnings issued within a radius of approximately 15 miles (25 km)
or 7.8 miles (12.5 km) around the vehicle are displayed on the warning
screen.

Function
Daytime weather
Nighttime weather
Maximum temperature
Minimum temperature
Precipitation probability

“Weather Map”: When this screen button
is touched, the “XM NavWeather” screen
is displayed.
“OK”: When this screen button is touched,
the screen returns to the map of the current position.

XM NavWeather™
INDICATOR

INFORMATION

 When an XM NavWeather™ warning is
issued within the vicinity, the XM
NavWeather™ indicator will appear on the
map screen.

297

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

5. XM NavTraffic®

The subscription-based XM NavTraffic®
service allows the navigation system to
display traffic information on the map
screen.

SHOW TRAFFIC EVENT

Press the “INFO/APPS” button.

Touch “Traffic Incidents”.

The following operations can be performed:
 Show XM NavTraffic® Information: Traffic
information is displayed on the map
screen. (See page 299.)
 Auto Avoid Traffic: If any heavy congestion or moderate traffic has been detected
on the guidance route, it may be possible
for you to select another route offered by
the system. (See page 114.)
 Traffic Incident Warning: Traffic congestion information is provided using voice
guidance. (See page 53.)
 Show Free Flowing Traffic: Freely flowing
traffic is shown by the arrow on the map.
(See page 115.)
INFORMATION

● When the “Traffic Information” indicator is dimmed, “Avoid Traffic”, “Traffic
Incident Warning” and “Show Free Flowing Traffic” will not operate. (See page
299.)

 A list of current traffic incidents is displayed along with information on the incident’s distance and position relative to the
vehicle.

Touch the desired traffic event.

“On Current Route”: Touch to display the
traffic congestion information for the selected route, or the road which the current
vehicle is on. If a route has not been set,
“On Current Road” will be displayed.

298

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

This screen is displayed.

SHOW XM NavTraffic®
INFORMATION

Touch “Show on Map”.

Touch “Traffic Information”.

 Guidance route traffic information is displayed on the screen. Touch “Detail” to
display detailed traffic event information.

 The “Traffic Information” indicator is
highlighted.

XM NavTraffic® information is displayed on the map screen.

On the map screen
INFORMATION

On the freeway information screen

299

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

XM NavTraffic® icon
 When any traffic information is received,
the XM NavTraffic® icon will appear on the
map screen. Touching the XM NavTraffic®
icon on the screen will start voice guidance for the traffic information. (See page
37.)
 When the XM NavTraffic® icon is selected,
voice guidance for the traffic information
will start even if “Off” for “Traffic Incident
Warning” is selected.

XM NavTraffic® indicator
 When any XM NavTraffic® information is
received, the XM NavTraffic® indicator will
appear on the screen. The color of the
indicator changes depending on the traffic
information received.
Color

Function

White

Traffic information has been
received.

Yellow

Traffic restriction information on the guidance route
has been received (screen
button*).

Red

Congestion information on
the guidance route has
been received (screen button*).

XM NavTraffic®information arrow
 When any XM NavTraffic® information is
received, the XM NavTraffic® information
arrow will appear on the map screen. The
color of the arrow changes depending on
the traffic information received.
Color

Function

Red

Heavy congestion

Yellow

Moderate traffic

Green

Freely flowing traffic

*: Touching the XM NavTraffic® indicator
will start voice guidance.

300

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

4. SETUP

1. XM SETTINGS
Used for changing settings for XM
Sports, XM Stocks and XM Fuel Prices.

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Other”.

Touch the item to be set.

No.

Function

Page

Touch to set XM Sports.

286

Touch to set XM Stocks.

289

Touch to set XM Fuel Prices.

292

INFORMATION

 On this screen, the following functions
can be performed:

301

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

4. SETUP

302

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

8
APPS
1

ENTUNE-OVERVIEW

1. ENTUNE SERVICE ..................... 304

SUBSCRIPTION .................................. 305
AVAILABILITY OF SERVICE............... 305
INITIALIZING PERSONAL DATA ........ 305

2. BEFORE USING ENTUNE.......... 306
SETTINGS REQUIRED TO USE
ENTUNE............................................ 306

USER REGISTRATION ....................... 306
REGISTERING THE ENTUNE
APPLICATION................................... 307

ENTUNE OPERATION

1. ACTIVATING “APPS”................. 308
ACTIVATING “APPS” .......................... 308
IF A MESSAGE APPEARS
ON THE SCREEN ............................. 310

2. LINKING “APPS” AND
NAVIGATION LOCAL
FUNCTION ................................ 311
SETTING A DESTINATION USING
“APPS” .............................................. 312
MAKING A PHONE CALL USING
“APPS” .............................................. 312

3. INPUTTING KEYWORD
OPERATION ............................. 313
INPUTTING A KEYWORD USING
THE SOFTWARE KEYBOARD ......... 313
INPUTTING A KEYWORD USING
THE VOICE RECOGNITION
FUNCTION ........................................ 313

303

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. ENTUNE-OVERVIEW

1. ENTUNE SERVICE*1
Entune is a service that enables the usable contents of a cellular phone to be
displayed on and operated from the navigation screen. Before Entune can be used,
a few settings need to be performed. (See page 306.)

No.

Name

Function

Contents provider

Provides contents to the navigation system via a cellular phone.

Application server

Provides applications to the navigation system via a cellular
phone.

Cellular phone*

Using the Entune application, communication is relayed between the navigation system, the application server and the
contents provider.
A cellular phone cannot be operated while communicating.

Application player

Runs applications on the navigation system. The navigation
system is equipped with an application player.

Applications
(“Apps”)

Displays and sounds the usable contents from the contents
providers via a cellular phone on the application player.

Navigation system

Contents received, via a cellular phone, from the contents provider servers are displayed on the navigation screen.

*1: Entune is available in the 48 states, D.C. and Alaska.
*2: For known compatible phones, refer to http://www.Toyota.com/entune/.
304

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. ENTUNE-OVERVIEW

SUBSCRIPTION
 Entune will be available on a 3 year trial
period included upon purchase of a new
vehicle. User registration is required to
start using the service. (See page 307.)
 When 3 years have elapsed after purchasing a new vehicle, a fee will be charged to
renew the contract.*
 Services requiring a separate contract can
also be used.*

*: For
details,
refer
to
http://
www.Toyota.com/entune/ or call 1-800331-4331.

INITIALIZING PERSONAL
DATA
The personal data used in “Apps” can
be reset. (See “DELETING PERSONAL DATA” on page 51.)
 The following personal data can be
deleted and returned to their default settings:
• Downloaded contents
• Radio stations that were listened to
• Input history
INFORMATION

AVAILABILITY OF SERVICE

● Once initialized, data will be erased. Pay
close attention when initializing the data.

 Entune is available in the 48 states, D.C.
and Alaska.
INFORMATION

● When using Entune, depending on the
details of your cellular phone contract,
data usage fees may apply. Confirm
data usage fees before using this service.
● In this section, the required operations
to activate “Apps”, connect a cellular
phone to the navigation system and registration steps for Entune are explained.
For details regarding Entune operations
and each of the “Apps”, refer to http://
www.Toyota.com/entune/.

APPS
305

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. ENTUNE-OVERVIEW

2. BEFORE USING ENTUNE
SETTINGS REQUIRED TO
USE ENTUNE
Perform the settings in the following order.

User registration

Download the Entune application to
your cellular phone.

USER REGISTRATION
When purchasing the vehicle, an email
address is registered at your Toyota
dealer. If your email address was not
registered at your Toyota dealer, your
email address can be registered at the
Entune website. A user registration
guidance email containing a web address will be sent.

Perform user registration from the designated web address.

In order to use Entune, the following settings must first be performed:
 User registration with the service contract
(See page 306.)
 Download the Entune application onto
your cellular phone, and login to the application. (See page 307.)
 Register the cellular phone that the
Entune application was downloaded to
with the navigation system. (See page
307.)
 Register a Bluetooth® phone with the
hands-free system. (For detailed information about registration and settings, see
“Bluetooth® SETTINGS” on page 177.)

306

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. ENTUNE-OVERVIEW

REGISTERING THE ENTUNE
APPLICATION

Download the Entune application using
your cellular phone.

Run the Entune application on your
cellular phone.

Enter a user name and password into
the Entune application. Login to the application.
INFORMATION

● “Apps” can only be used when the
Entune application has been downloaded to your cellular phone and the
application is running.
● If your email address was not registered
at your Toyota dealer when the vehicle
was purchased, an email address can
be registered at http://www.Toyota.com/
entune/.
● Entune operational procedures can also
be confirmed by visiting http://
www.Toyota.com/entune/.
● In order to use “Apps”, it is necessary to
run the Entune application, enter your
user name and password and display
the main menu on the cellular phone.
● An iPhone cannot be connected via
Bluetooth® and USB connection at the
same time. However, it is possible to
recharge an iPhone while using Entune
by connecting via USB. The system
uses the connection method that was
used last. Therefore, if connected via
USB after Bluetooth® connection, it is
necessary to reconnect the iPhone via
Bluetooth®.

APPS
307

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ENTUNE OPERATION

1. ACTIVATING “APPS”
Each time “Apps” is activated, the system checks for updates. When there
are no updates available, the main
menu screen will be displayed right after a screen indicating that updates are
being checked for has been displayed.

ACTIVATING “APPS”

Press the “INFO/APPS” button.

 To cancel updating, touch “Cancel”.
 After touching “Cancel”, the “Information”
screen will be displayed.
 The “Information” screen will also be displayed if updating fails.

Touch “Update”.

A screen indicating that an update is in
progress will be displayed.

Touch “Apps”.
 To stop updating, touch “Cancel”.
 After touching “Cancel”, the “Information”
screen will be displayed.
 The “Information” screen will also be displayed if updating fails.

6
3

Touch “OK”.

A screen indicating that updates are
being checked for will be displayed.

308

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ENTUNE OPERATION

When updating is complete, the main
menu screen will be displayed.

 The screen shown above is only an example. The actual screen may be different.
 For details about the function and service
of each application displayed in the main
menu, refer to http://www.Toyota.com/
entune/.

APPS
309

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ENTUNE OPERATION

IF A MESSAGE APPEARS ON THE SCREEN
When problems occur starting up the application player, a message will appear on
the screen. Referring to the table below to identify the problem, take the suggested
corrective action.
Message

Display conditions

Corrective action

“This feature is unavailable
during an emergency call.”

Safety Connect is being implemented.

After Safety Connect is finished, perform the operation
again.

“This feature is unavailable
while transferring contacts.”

Contacts are being transferred manually from the
phonebook.

When the transfer of contacts
is complete, perform the operation.

“There is a problem with the
Bluetooth* connection.
For
troubleshooting
assistance,
please
visit
Toyota.com or call 1-800331-4331.”

The cellular phone cannot be
connected.

Refer to http://www.Toyota.
com/entune/ to confirm if the
phone is compatible or not.

“This feature is unavailable
during a handsfree call.”

A hands-free
progress.

After the hands-free call is finished, perform the operation.

call

“To use the services, an active application needs to be
running on your phone. For
more information, please visit
Toyota.com.”

The Entune application cannot be connected to SSP.

Refer to http://www.Toyota.
com/entune/ to confirm if the
phone is SSP compatible or
not, and then activate the
Entune application.

“Communication
Please try again.”

Communication was disconnected.

After a few moments, retry
the operation.

error.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

310

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ENTUNE OPERATION

2. LINKING “APPS” AND NAVIGATION LOCAL FUNCTION
The navigation system’s setting a destination and making a hands-free call
can be performed via “Apps” of
Entune.

When updating is complete, the main
menu screen will be displayed.

Press the “INFO/APPS” button.

Touch “Apps”.

INFORMATION

● Some parts of “Apps” can be adjusted
using the switches on the steering
wheel.

A screen indicating that updates are
being checked for will be displayed.
8

APPS
311

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ENTUNE OPERATION

SETTING A DESTINATION
USING “APPS”
Locations that were searched using
“Apps” can be set as a destination.

Touch “Map”.

Touch “Go to

To start guidance, touch “OK”.

”.

MAKING A PHONE CALL
USING “APPS”
Phone calls can be made to locations
which were searched using “Apps”.

Touch “Call”.

Touch “Yes”.

 To cancel making a phone call, touch
“Cancel”.

 For the operation of the route guidance
screen and the function of each screen
button, see “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 74.

A screen indicating that a call is in
progress will be displayed.

 For phone operation and the function of
each screen button, see “TALK ON THE
Bluetooth® PHONE” on page 149.

312

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ENTUNE OPERATION

3. INPUTTING KEYWORD OPERATION
A keyword can be input to “Apps” by
the software keyboard or voice recognition function.
 The keyboard layout can be changed.
(See page 47.)

INPUTTING A KEYWORD
USING THE SOFTWARE
KEYBOARD

Touch the character input space.

Touch the screen buttons to input the
desired characters, and then touch
“OK”.

 For details on operating the keyboard,
see “INPUTTING LETTERS AND NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN OPERATION” on
page 28.

INPUTTING A KEYWORD
USING THE VOICE
RECOGNITION FUNCTION
Voice recognition is a function that
uses the center’s database to enable
the use of the voice recognition function.

Touch the microphone screen button.

When this screen is displayed, say the
desired keyword.

Input characters will be reflected on the
character input space.

APPS

 Completion of saying the keyword will be
detected automatically.

313

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ENTUNE OPERATION

Search results will be displayed on the
screen.

 The screen shown above is only an example. The actual screen may be different.

314

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ENTUNE OPERATION

APPS
315

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

9
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

REAR VIEW MONITOR
SYSTEM

1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
OPERATION ............................. 318
AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN ........ 320
THE REAR VIEW MONITOR
SYSTEM CAMERA............................ 320

316

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

9
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
1

ADVANCED PARKING
GUIDANCE SYSTEM

1. INTRODUCTION .......................... 322
ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE
SYSTEM ........................................... 322

5. WHAT TO DO WHEN THIS SORT
OF MESSAGE IS
DISPLAYED .............................. 355

PRE-SUPPORT SWITCH ................... 323

WHEN A RED FRAME IS
DISPLAYED IN
THE ASSIST MODE.......................... 359

2. MANEUVERING WHEN
PARKING................................... 324

6. MANUAL GUIDE LINE DISPLAY
MODE ........................................ 360

MANEUVERING WHEN PARKING..... 324

EXAMPLE OF HOW TO USE
THE SYSTEM WHEN PARKING
(PERPENDICULAR PARKING) ........ 360

3. PARKING ASSIST MODE
(PERPENDICULAR
PARKING).................................. 330
PARKING ASSIST MODE
(PERPENDICULAR PARKING) ........ 330
PRE-SUPPORT FUNCTION ............... 330
EASY SET FUNCTION ....................... 331
OPERATING PROCEDURE ............... 333
TIPS FOR SETTING THE TARGET
PARKING POSITION........................ 340

WHAT TO DO WHEN THIS SORT
OF MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED ......... 355

EXAMPLE OF HOW TO USE
THE SYSTEM WHEN
PARALLEL PARKING ....................... 365

7. USAGE PRECAUTIONS ............. 366

DRIVING PRECAUTIONS ................... 366
AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN........ 368

THE ADVANCED PARKING
GUIDANCE SYSTEM CAMERA ....... 369

4. PARALLEL PARKING ASSIST
MODE......................................... 344

DIFFERENCES BETWEEN
THE DISPLAY AND
THE ACTUAL ROAD......................... 370

PARALLEL PARKING ASSIST
MODE ............................................... 344

WHEN A THREE-DIMENSIONAL
OBJECT IS NEARBY ........................ 372

PRE-SUPPORT FUNCTION ............... 344

SENSOR .............................................. 373

OPERATING PROCEDURE ............... 345

INITIALIZING THE SYSTEM ............... 375

TIPS FOR SETTING THE TARGET
PARKING POSITION........................ 352

317

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION
The rear view monitor system assists
the driver by displaying an image of the
view behind the vehicle while backing
up. The image is displayed in reverse
on the screen. This reversed image is
a similar image to the one on the inside
rear view mirror.

To display the rear view image on the
screen, shift the shift position to “R”
when the “POWER” switch is in ON
mode and the back door is completely
closed.

 If you move the shift position out of the
“R”, the screen returns to the previous
screen. Operating another function of
the navigation system will display
another screen.
 The rear view monitor system is a supplement device intended to assist back
up. When backing up, be sure to check
behind and all around the vehicle visually.

CAUTION
● Never depend on the rear view monitor
system entirely when backing up.
Always make sure your intended path is
clear.
Use caution, just as you would when
backing up any vehicle.
● Never back up while looking only at the
screen. The image on the screen is different from actual conditions. Depicted
distances between objects and flat surfaces will differ from actual distance. If
you back up while looking only at the
screen, you may hit a vehicle, a person
or an object. When backing up, be sure
to check behind and all around the vehicle visually and with mirrors before proceeding.
● Do not use the system when the back
door is not completely closed.
● Use your own eyes to confirm the vehicle’s surroundings, as the displayed
image may become faint or dark, and
moving images will be distorted, or not
entirely visible when the outside temperature is low. When backing up, be sure
to check behind and all around the vehicle visually and with mirror before proceeding.

318

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

NOTICE

● If the camera lens becomes dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. If water droplets, snow, or mud adhere to the lens,
rinse with water and wipe with a soft
cloth. If the lens is extremely dirty, wash
it with a mild cleanser and rinse.

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

● If the back of the vehicle is hit, the position and mounting angle of the camera
may change. Be sure to have the camera’s position and mounting angle
checked at your Toyota dealer.
● As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble or
modify it. This may cause incorrect operation.
● If the temperature changes rapidly, such
as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in cold weather, the system may not
operate normally.
● Do not hit the camera or subject it to
strong impact as this may cause its position and mounting angle to change.
● Do not strongly rub the camera lens. If
the camera lens is scratched, it cannot
transmit a clear image.
● Do not allow organic solvent, car wax,
window cleaner or glass coat to adhere
to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off
as soon as possible.
● When replacing the tires, please consult
your Toyota dealer. If you replace the
tires, the area displayed on the screen
may change.
● When washing the vehicle, do not apply
intensive bursts of water to the camera
or camera area. Doing so may result in
the camera malfunctioning.

INFORMATION

319

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

AREA DISPLAYED ON
SCREEN
The image displayed on the screen is
an approximation only.

THE REAR VIEW MONITOR
SYSTEM CAMERA
The rear view monitor system camera
is located as shown in the illustration.

INFORMATION

Corners of bumper
INFORMATION

● The area detected by the camera is limited. The camera does not detect
objects which are close to either corner
of the bumper or under the bumper.

● The area displayed on the screen may
vary according to vehicle orientation or
road conditions.

● The camera uses a special lens. The
distance of the image that appears on
the screen differs from the actual distance.
● When the camera is used under fluorescent lights, sodium lights or mercury
lights etc., the lights and the illuminated
areas may appear to flicker.
● In the following cases, it may become
difficult to see the images on the screen,
even when the system is functioning:
• In the dark (for example, at night)
• When the temperature near the lens is
high or low
• When water droplets are adhering to
the camera, or when humidity is high
(for example, when it rains)
• When foreign matter (for example,
snow or mud) is adhering to the camera
• When the camera has scratches or dirt
on it
• When the sun or the beam of headlights is shining directly into the camera lens

320

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

INFORMATION

• If a bright light (for example, sunlight
reflected off the vehicle body) is picked
up by the camera, the smear effect*
peculiar to the camera may occur.

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

*: Smear effect
A phenomenon that occurs when a
bright light (for example, sunlight
reflected off the vehicle body) is picked
up by the camera; when transmitted by
the camera, the light source appears to
have a vertical streak above and below
it.

321

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

1. INTRODUCTION
ADVANCED PARKING
GUIDANCE SYSTEM
The advanced parking guidance system helps back up parking by combining and displaying guide lines on a
rear-view image in order to provide a
reference for back up maneuvering, as
well as automatically controlling the
steering wheel when backing into a target parking position set on the screen.
The system will not automatically back
up or regulate speed.

 As the system only assists with parking in
a set target parking position, there are
times when the system will be unable to
render this assistance, depending on factors such as road surface or vehicle condition, or the distance to the set target
parking position.

■SELECTING A LANGUAGE
See “SELECTING A LANGUAGE” on
page 46 for the procedure to select a
language. Once you select a language,
the advanced parking guidance system
will indicate that language until you select another language.

The advanced parking guidance system is not an automatic parking system. It is a system to assist back up
parking.

CAUTION
● When backing up, be sure to check your
surroundings and behind the vehicle for
safety, and back up slowly, depressing
the brake pedal to control vehicle speed.
● If you seem likely to hit nearby vehicles,
obstacles or people, depress the brake
pedal to stop the vehicle, and then disable the system by touching
on the
screen.
● Depending on the characteristics of the
camera lens, the distance to or position
of people or obstacles shown on the
screen may differ slightly from actual
conditions.

322

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

PRE-SUPPORT SWITCH
Use this switch to turn on/off the presupport function and to switch assist
mode between parallel parking assist
mode and perpendicular parking assist
mode.

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

 Pressing the pre-support switch while
“POWER” switch is in ON mode and the
vehicle is travelling below 9 mph (15 km/h)
with the shift position in any position other
than “P” or “R”, will cause the screen to
change in the following order.
Pre-support function OFF
(Navigation screen, etc.)
Parallel parking assist mode
pre-support screen
Perpendicular parking assist
mode pre-support screen

Pre-support function OFF
(Navigation screen, etc.)

 If the pre-support function cannot be used,
two beeps will sound.

323

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

2. MANEUVERING WHEN PARKING
TO ACTIVATE THE ADVANCED
PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

MANEUVERING WHEN
PARKING
Instructions given are only examples.
When and how much to turn the steering wheel will vary according to traffic
conditions, road surface conditions,
vehicle condition, etc. when parking.
It is necessary to be fully aware of this
before using the advanced parking
guidance system.
Also, when parking, be sure to check
that the parking space will accommodate your vehicle before maneuvering
into it.

To activate the advanced parking guidance system, shift the shift position to
“R” when the “POWER” switch is in ON
mode and the back door is completely
closed.

 If you move the shift position out of “R”,
the screen returns to the previous screen.
Operating another function of the navigation system will display another screen.
 Even if the shift position is in “R”, if you
press any of the mode buttons around the
display, such as “MAP/VOICE” or “INFO/
APPS”, the screen will switch to that
mode.

CAUTION
● Depending on the circumstances of the
vehicle (number of passengers, amount
of luggage, etc.), the position of the
guide lines displayed on the screen may
change. Be sure to check visually
behind and all around the vehicle before
proceeding.

324

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

THE MODES OF THE PARKING
ASSIST FUNCTION
The parking assist function has the
parking assist mode and parallel parking assist mode. Use each mode according to need.
No.

Function

When the parking assist function is
selected, the select button is highlighted.
Camera orientation confirmation
lines
If the edge of the bumper displayed
on the screen does not match the
camera orientation confirmation
lines, the camera may not be aligned
correctly. Have the vehicle checked
by your Toyota dealer.

No.

325

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

Select button
Touch to switch between the parking
assist function and the parking guide
line display function. The selected
function will remain even after the hybrid system turns off and then restarts it.
 The parking assist function assists
the driver by automatically controlling the steering wheel when backing up, in order to park in the target
parking position set on the screen.
 The parking guide line display
function assists the driver by displaying an image of the area
behind the vehicle while backing
up.

The guide lines are displayed on the
screen.

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

No.

Function
Distance guide line (yellow)
The line moves, together with the estimated path guide lines, in sync with
the steering wheel. This line indicates a position on the ground approximately 3 ft. (1 m) behind the rear
bumper of the vehicle.
When the steering wheel is turned,
distance errors may occur.
Distance guide line (red)
The line moves, together with the estimated path guide lines, in sync with
the steering wheel. This line indicates a position on the ground approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) behind the
rear bumper of the vehicle.
When the steering wheel is turned,
distance errors may occur.

No.

Function
Parking assist mode button
Touch to turn parking assist mode
on.
See “PARKING ASSIST MODE
(PERPENDICULAR PARKING)” on
page 330 for details.

INFORMATION

● The guide lines, buttons and camera orientation confirmation lines will not be
displayed if the back door is open. To
display them, close the back door completely.

Distance guide line (blue)
The line indicates a position on the
ground approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m)
behind the rear bumper of the vehicle.
Parallel parking assist mode button
Touch to turn parallel parking assist
mode on.
See “PARALLEL PARKING ASSIST
MODE” on page 344 for details.

326

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

DISABLING THE ADVANCED
PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
When in the parking assist mode or parallel parking assist mode, in the following case the voice guidance will say
“The guidance has been canceled.”, a
message will be displayed, and the system will be disabled. For displayed message, see page 355.
After the following operations
 Moving the steering wheel
 Using the accelerator
 Moving the shift position out of “R”
 Applying the parking brake
 Switching the screen display

THE MODES OF THE PARKING
GUIDE LINE DISPLAY
FUNCTION
The parking guide line display function
has the following modes. Use each
mode according to need.

■ESTIMATED
MODE

PATH

GUIDANCE

The guide lines are displayed on the
screen.

In the following situation

If the system is disabled while backing
up, grip the steering wheel firmly and depress the brake pedal to bring the vehicle to a halt. The system has been
completely disabled, so you may either
start again from the beginning, or if you
wish to finish parking manually, be sure
to operate the steering wheel as you
would normally.

No.

327

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

 If the vehicle slips forward or stops after
taking your foot off the brake pedal
 If the backing speed is too fast
 If normal assistance cannot be rendered
due to worn tires or low tire inflation pressure
 If the target parking position has not been
confirmed on the target parking position
setting screen before backing up
 Any warnings displayed on the screen are
not acknowledged before backing up
 If there is a system malfunction
 If the system temperature protection function operates

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

No.

■PARKING ASSIST GUIDE LINE DISPLAY MODE

The guide lines are displayed on the
screen.

No.

Function
Select button
Touch to switch between the parking
assist function and the parking guide
line display function. When the parking assist function is selected, the select button is highlighted.
Vehicle width extension guide lines
These lines indicate the estimated
vehicle width.
Parking assist guide lines
These lines indicate the points at
which you turn the steering wheel.
These lines also indicate a estimated
path for guidance when turning the
smallest degree of the wheel while
backing up.
Distance guide line
This line indicates a position on the
ground approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m)
behind the rear bumper of the vehicle.

328

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

No.

Function
Course line deletion mode screen
button
Touch to turn course line deletion
mode on.

■COURSE LINE DELETION MODE
The guide lines are displayed on the
screen.

No.

Function

Distance guide line
This line indicates a position on the
ground approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m)
behind the rear bumper of the vehicle.
Estimated path guidance mode
screen button
Touch to turn estimated path guidance mode on.

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

Select button
Touch to switch between the parking
assist function and the parking guide
line display function. When the parking assist function is selected, the select button is highlighted.

INFORMATION

● The guide lines and buttons will not display if the back door is open. To display
them, close the back door completely.

329

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

3. PARKING ASSIST MODE (PERPENDICULAR PARKING)
PARKING ASSIST MODE
(PERPENDICULAR PARKING)

Parking on the next side of another
parked vehicle

Parking assist mode assists the driver
with perpendicular parking by automatically controlling the steering wheel when
backing up, in order to park in the target
position set on the screen.
This mode can be used when the assist
mode is ON.

PRE-SUPPORT FUNCTION
The pre-support function can be used
when another vehicle is parked on the
near side of the intended parking space.
This function uses a tone to give parking
guidance.
 Guidance will not be given if the detected
space is narrow.

Press the pre-support switch twice
Identify a parking space
Get into a position to maneuver the
steering wheel
Get into a position to begin back up
maneuvering

Parking between two parked vehicles

Press the pre-support switch twice
Identify a parking space
Get into a position to maneuver the
steering wheel
Get into a position to begin back up
maneuvering

330

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

INFORMATION

● To allow the pre-support system to activate accurately, move the vehicle as
slowly as possible (at a speed that will
allow the vehicle to be stopped suddenly).
● If only one vehicle is parked, the presupport system cannot be used to park
on the right side of the vehicle.

The easy set function can be used if the
pre-support function is not in use.
If the parking space has a white outline,
the easy set function can be used to
commence parking without adjusting the
target parking position.
This function has the following features:
1. When the shift position is in “R” and a
white parking space outline has been
detected, the target parking position
can be minutely adjusted.
2. If a white parking space outline has not
been detected under the conditions described in 1 above: by turning the steering wheel toward the desired parking
space, a white parking space outline
can be detected in that direction and
set as the target parking position.

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

● The function cannot be used if the shift
position is in “P” or “R”, or if the vehicle
speed is faster than 9 mph (15 km/h).
● In order to identify parking spaces and
detect parked vehicles using the sensors on both sides of the front bumper,
guidance cannot be given if a space is
not detected.
● Parking space guidance and searching
continues until the vehicle speed is
faster than 9 mph (15 km/h) or until the
function is turned off by pressing the
pre-support switch.

EASY SET FUNCTION

331

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

INFORMATION

● The easy set function will not operate in
the following cases:
• When the assist mode is OFF
• When the pre-support function is in
use
• When parallel parking
● Under the following circumstances, a
parking space outline may not be
detected on the road and the easy set
function may not operate:
• The parking space does not have a
white outline (roped or blocked parking
spaces etc.)
• The lines are faded or dirty, making
them unclear.
• The road surface is of a light color
which does not contrast well with the
white lines. (yellow lines painted on
concrete road surfaces, etc.)
• The parking space lines are a color
other than white (yellow etc.).
• The area is dark, for example at night
or in a covered parking lot.
• During or after rain, when the road surface is wet and reflects light, or puddles have formed.
• The sun is shining directly on the camera, for example early morning or late
afternoon.
• The parking space is covered with
snow or de-icing agent.
• There are markings or maintenance
marks on the road surface.
• The color or brightness of the road surface is not uniform.
• Hot or cold water has splashed on the
camera, and the lens is fogged.
• There are dirt or water droplets on the
lens.

INFORMATION

● Under the following circumstances, the
target parking space may be mis recognized:
• There are obstructions such as maintenance damage, road markings, poles
etc.
• During or after rain, when the road surface is wet and reflects light, or puddles have formed.
• The color or brightness of the road surface is not uniform.
• The parking space is on a slope
• An effect is being caused by parked
vehicle (the shadow, grill, sidestep etc.
of a parked vehicle)
• The lines are faded or dirty, making
them unclear.
● Even in situations where the easy set
function cannot be used (for example,
when the parking space outline is missing or difficult to detect), the target parking position can still be set by touching
the Parking assist mode button.

332

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

WHEN THE PRE-SUPPORT
FUNCTION IS IN USE

OPERATING PROCEDURE
CAUTION
● When backing up, be sure to check your
surroundings and behind the vehicle for
safety, and back up slowly, depressing
the brake pedal to control vehicle speed.
● If you seem likely to hit nearby vehicles,
obstacles or people, depress the brake
pedal to stop the vehicle, then disable
the system by touching
on the
screen.

Check that the assist mode switch is
ON.

With the vehicle speed at less than 9
mph (15 km/h) and the vehicle on the
near side of the parking space, press
the pre-support switch twice. Confirm
that the display has switched to the
“Back-In Mode” screen.

Use the system with full understanding
of the fact.
If a message is displayed while maneuvering, follow the procedures outlined in
“WHAT TO DO WHEN THIS SORT OF
MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED” on page
355.
The illustrations here describe the procedure for pulling into a parking space
on the right. For pulling into a parking
space on the left, substitute left for right
and vice versa in all steps.
The operating method differs depending
on whether or not the pre-support function is in use.

Press the pre-support switch twice
Sensor detection range

 The mode will switch with each press of
the pre-support switch.
 If the shift position is in “P” or if the vehicle
speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or above, two
beeps will sound when the pre-support
switch is pressed, and the display will not
change. (If the shift position is in “R”, the
display will not change.)

333

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

As the system only assists with parking
in a set target parking position, there are
times when the system will be unable to
render this assistance, depending on
factors such as road surface or vehicle
condition, or the distance to the set target parking position.

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

Move the vehicle to a position perpendicular to the parking space, and as
close as possible to the parked vehicle.

When two chimes sound, stop the vehicle and straighten the steering wheel.

 Move the vehicle forward as slowly as
possible so that the steering wheel can be
turned as soon as the chime sounds.
 To cancel the guidance function, turn off
the pre-support function by pressing the
pre-support switch once.

As soon as the chime sounds, rotate
the wheel halfway or more and proceed forwards.

 Move the vehicle forward as slowly as
possible after turning the steering wheel
so that the vehicle can be stopped as
soon as the two chimes sound.
 The chimes will not sound if the vehicle
does not arrive in a backing-up position
after the steering wheel has been maneuvered. If the vehicle is stopped and the
shift position is shifted to “R” before the
chimes sound, the screen shown in step 6
of “WHEN THE PRE-SUPPORT FUNCTION IS NOT IN USE” on page 335 is displayed.

Shift to “R”.

 For operation after shifting to “R”:
 See step 7 of “WHEN THE PRE-SUPPORT FUNCTION IS NOT IN USE” on
page 335.

 The chime sounds when the center of the
parking space can be seen directly beside
the vehicle.

334

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

WHEN THE PRE-SUPPORT
FUNCTION IS NOT IN USE

Check that the assist mode switch is
ON.

Move your vehicle slowly to a position
perpendicular to the parking space,
and as close as possible to the parking
space.

Move your vehicle to a position where
you can see the center of the parking
space right besides you.

If only a vehicle is parked on one side of
the parking space or two vehicles are
parked on both sides of the parking
space
Move your vehicle to a position from which
the exact center of the parking space can
be seen beside you before beginning to
turn the steering wheel.

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

 Positioning the vehicle perpendicular to
the parking space allows the angle of the
parking position to be identified easily.
 To facilitate the setting of the target parking position, the front side sensors detect
the vehicles parked at the left and right of
the parking space and identify the target
parking position.

335

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

If no vehicle or small vehicles are parked
on both sides of the desired parking
space
Move your vehicle to a position from which
the exact center of the parking space can
be seen beside you, straighten the steering wheel and stop the vehicle.

 By stopping the vehicle here, you can
mostly identify the parking location, making it easier to set the target parking position.
 Make sure the steering wheel is straight
when you stop. If not, the parking location
cannot be identified.
 If you do not stop in front of the parking
space, the system will refer to the angle of
the vehicle relative to the target parking
space, and display the target parking position (blue or red frame) in the position
used last time the parking assist mode
was activated.

5
6

Position your vehicle so that you can
enter the parking space, then stop the
vehicle with the steering wheel
straight.

 To enter the target parking space more
accurately, position your vehicle with a
larger heading angle.

Shift to “R”.
Conduct the following operation.

If a parking position has been identified
by the easy set function
Confirm that the blue frame is aligned with
the space you wish to park in and touch
“OK”.

 After touching “OK”:
 Go to step 8
 To change the parking position:
 Touch
then
, then go to step
7

336

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

NOTICE
● If the blue frame or a warning flag is over
a parked vehicle, or the target parking
position has been otherwise misrecognized, touch
to cancel and change
the parking position.

For the warning flag and blue frame,
see the CAUTION section of step 7.

If a parking position hasn’t been identified using the easy set function

Turn the steering wheel toward the direction in which you wish to park.

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

 If a target parking position can be identified, the screen will switch to the screen
shown in “If a parking position has been
identified by the easy set function”. (See
page 336.)
 If a parking position is not identified and
the screen does not change, touch
and then go to step 7.

337

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

Use the arrow to align the blue frame
with the desired parking space, then
touch “OK”.

 You can also move the blue frame by
touching the screen (area other than the
arrow).
 There are tricks to align the blue frame.
See “TIPS FOR SETTING THE TARGET
PARKING POSITION” on page 340.
 If the orientation of the frame is opposite
to that of the target parking space:
 Touch
.
 Areas in which you are unable to park are
displayed in red.

 If the frame is displayed in red, you cannot
use the parking assist mode to park in that
location. See “WHEN A RED FRAME IS
DISPLAYED IN THE ASSIST MODE” on
page 359.
 When the blue frame is displayed, if you
begin backing up without touching “OK”,
the message “Parking position has not
been set.” appears. If you continue to
back up, you will hear a warning tone and
the system will be disabled.
If the frame is red, there will be no guidance even if you begin backing up.
 There may be times when, due to image
distortion, the blue frame does not match
the parking space lines on the road surface. In this case, attempt an approximate
match in an area where the warning flag
does not overlap with any parked vehicles
or obstacles.

CAUTION
● The warning flag is only a guide. Be sure
to directly check your surroundings and
behind the vehicle for safety, and back
up carefully.
● Always check that there are no obstacles in the blue frame or between your
vehicle and the parking space, and that
the warning flag does not overlap any
parked vehicles or walls.
● If there are obstacles in the blue frame
or between your vehicle and the parking
space, or the warning flag overlaps a
parked vehicle or wall, there is a danger
of collision. In this case, do not use the
parking assist mode.

● If the road surface has level variations or
a gradient between the starting position
and target parking position, it will not be
possible to correctly set the location,
which may cause the parking position to
be misaligned or crooked. In this case,
do not use the parking assist mode.
● If the red area which denotes an area
unsuitable for parking overlaps with the
lines of the parking space, you will be
unable to park, as the parking space is
judged as being an area unsuitable for
parking. Progress to a position where
the parking space lines do not overlap
with such an area.

338

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

Position yourself as you would when
backing up normally, and rest your
hands on the steering wheel without
applying any pressure. Check your
surroundings and behind the vehicle
for safety, and slowly back up, using
the brake pedal to control the vehicle’s
speed.

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

 If you touch
, assistance is canceled.
 If the vehicle’s backing up speed is too
fast, a warning tone will sound and the
message “! Vehicle is moving too fast.” will
be displayed. If you continue to back up at
that speed, the system will be disabled.
Back up at a speed that does not cause
the warning tone to sound.
 The blue frame displayed on the screen is
approximately the same size as your vehicle. (The blue frame displayed when setting the target parking position is the size
of a normal parking space.)

339

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

Once the vehicle is mostly within the
target parking position, voice guidance
will give a message, and parking assist
mode will finish.

TIPS FOR SETTING THE
TARGET PARKING POSITION
Useful information for setting the target
parking position (blue frame)
THE DISPLAY POSITION OF
THE BLUE FRAME
The system decides the initial positioning of the blue frame by the position of
the parking space detected by the front
side sensors or the position of the vehicle when it stops, and by detecting the
white lines of the parking space in the
camera image to identify the parking
space location.
The front side sensors identify the parking space location and the white lines
near that location are detected.

 For safety, voice guidance is given slightly
before the target parking position. Furthermore, at that point system control will finish, so grip the steering wheel firmly, and
finish parking in the desired position, using
the brake to control the vehicle’s speed.
 Using the distance guide line as a reference, check in front and behind the vehicle visually and check with the mirrors
while backing up.

The front side sensors cannot identify
the parking space location, or the parking space location may be misaligned in
the following situations.
 A vehicle is parked at the back of the parking space or the sensors cannot detect a
parked vehicle due to vehicle shape etc.
 The sensors cannot detect a pole or wall
beside the parking space.
 The sensors detect a pedestrian or object
near the parking space.

340

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

INFORMATION

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

● If there are no vehicles parked on either
side of the target parking space when
your vehicle stops, the approximate
parking space location is identified, and
the white lines in that location are
detected. For this reason, stopping in
front of the parking space will make the
detection of target parking space’s white
lines easier.
● Successful detection of the parking
space’s white lines may not be possible,
depending on the shape of the line.
● In the following circumstances, detection
of the parking space lines on the road
surface may not be possible:
• The lines are faded or dirty, making
them unclear.
• The road surface is of a light color
which does not contrast well with the
white lines.
• The parking space lines are a color
other than white (yellow etc.).
• The area is dark, for example at night
or in a covered parking lot.
• During or after rain, when the road surface is wet and reflects light, or puddles have formed.
• The sun is shining directly on the camera, for example early morning or late
afternoon.
• The parking space is covered with
snow or de-icing agent.
• There are markings or maintenance
marks on the road surface.
• The color or brightness of the road surface is not uniform.
• Hot or cold water has splashed on the
camera, and the lens is fogged.
• There are dirt or water droplets on the
lens.

If the point at which you stop is correctly
identified, the blue frame will display the
parking space accurately. If the white
lines of the parking space have not been
correctly identified, the blue frame will
not match the parking space even if you
stop in the correct location. In this case,
adjust the point at which you stop as
needed.

341

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

ALIGNING THE BLUE FRAME
There are two ways to align the blue
frame with the parking space, either using the arrows on the screen, or by
touching the screen at points other than
the arrows.

■DIRECTLY TOUCHING THE TARGET POINT

By touching the point you wish to move
the frame to, you can move the blue
frame.

Touch the front edge of the place you
wish to move.

The frame will be moved as shown.

■USING THE ARROWS ON THE
SCREEN

By touching the arrows displayed on the
screen, you can move the blue frame.

INFORMATION

● If you touch the following areas, the blue
frame will not move:
• The area surrounding the arrows.
• The area near the lower screen button
on the screen.
• Areas too far away to park in the range
of 31.2 ft. (9.5 m) or more behind, and/
or either left or right from the current
position.

342

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

IF THE PARKING SPACE AND
THE BLUE FRAME DO NOT
MATCH
If the lines of the parking space are wider than the blue frame, position the
frame so that the difference between the
frame and the parking space lines is
equal on both sides.

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
9

343

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

4. PARALLEL PARKING ASSIST MODE
PARALLEL PARKING ASSIST
MODE

■PARKING BETWEEN TWO VEHICLES

Parallel parking assist mode assists
the driver with parallel parking by automatically controlling the steering wheel
when backing up, in order to park in the
target position set on the screen.
This mode can be used when the assist mode is ON.

PRE-SUPPORT FUNCTION
The pre-support function can be used
when there is a space between two
parked vehicles.
If a parking space is detected, this
function will inform the driver using a
tone when the vehicle is in a position to
begin backing up, and guides the vehicle to a position from which assistance
can be given.
 Guidance will not be given if the detected
space is narrow.

Press the pre-support switch once
Identify a parking space
Get into a position to begin back up
maneuvering

344

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

INFORMATION

Use the system with full understanding
of the fact.
If a message is displayed while maneuvering, follow the procedures outlined in
“WHAT TO DO WHEN THIS SORT OF
MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED” on page
355.

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

The illustrations here describe the procedure for pulling into a parking space
on the right. For pulling into a parking
space on the left, substitute left for right
and vice versa in all steps.
9
The operating method differs depending
on whether or not the pre-support function is in use.

345

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

WHEN THE PRE-SUPPORT
FUNCTION IS IN USE

Check that the assist mode switch is
ON.

With the vehicle speed at less than 9
mph (15 km/h) and the vehicle on the
near side of the parking space, press
the pre-support switch once. Confirm
that the display has switched to the
“Parallel Parking Mode” screen.

Press the pre-support switch once
Sensor detection range

Move the vehicle to a position parallel
to the road (or road shoulder) that is
also approximately 3 ft. (1 m) away
from the parked vehicle, and then proceed straight forward.

Approx. 3 ft. (1 m)
Desired parking location

 To cancel the guidance function, turn off
the pre-support function by pressing the
pre-support switch twice.

346

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

Stop the vehicle when two chimes
sound.

 Two chimes sound when the vehicle
reaches a position from which the front
edge of the leading parked vehicle can be
seen alongside.

Shift to “R”.

 For operation after shifting to “R”
 See step 6 of “WHEN THE PRE-SUPPORT FUNCTION IS NOT IN USE” on
page 348.

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

 Move the vehicle forward as slowly as
possible so that the vehicle can be
stopped as soon as the two chimes
sound.
 The chimes will not sound if the vehicle
does not arrive in a backing-up position. If
the vehicle is stopped and the shift position is shifted to “R” before the chimes
sound, the screen shown in step 5 of
“WHEN THE PRE-SUPPORT FUNCTION IS NOT IN USE” on page 348 is displayed.

347

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

WHEN THE PRE-SUPPORT
FUNCTION IS NOT IN USE

Check that the assist mode switch is
ON.

Move your vehicle slowly to a position
parallel to the road or shoulder approximately 3 ft. (1 m) away from parked
vehicles.

Approx. 3 ft. (1 m)
Desired parking location

Stop your vehicle in a position where
you can see the front edge of the leading parked vehicle right beside you,
with the steering wheel straight.

 To facilitate the setting of the target parking position, the front side sensors detect
the vehicles parked in front of and behind
the parking space and identify the target
parking position.
 If there is no leading parked vehicle, the
system will display the target parking position (blue or red frame) in the position
used last time the parallel parking assist
mode was activated.

348

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

CAUTION
● Be sure to stop the vehicle parallel to the
road or shoulder. If the vehicle is not
parallel, the assist location will be very
near the shoulder.
If it looks like the vehicle will hit or mount
the shoulder, depress the brake pedal to
stop the vehicle, and touch
on the
screen to deactivate the system.

Shift to “R”.

Touch

on the screen.

Use the arrow to align the blue frame
with your target parking space, and
touch “OK”.

 You can also move the blue frame by
touching the screen (area other than the
arrows).
 There are tricks to align the blue frame.
See “TIPS FOR SETTING THE TARGET
PARKING POSITION” on page 352.
 If the orientation of the frame is opposite
to that of the target parking space:
 Touch
.

 If the frame is displayed in red, you cannot
use the parallel parking assist mode to
park in that location. See “WHEN A RED
FRAME IS DISPLAYED IN THE ASSIST
MODE” on page 359.
 When the blue frame is displayed, if you
begin backing up without touching “OK”,
the message “Parking position has not
been set.” appears. If you continue to
back up, you will hear a warning tone and
the system will be disabled.
If the frame is red, there will be no guidance even if you begin backing up.
 There may be times when, due to image
distortion, the blue frame does not match
the parking space lines on the road surface. In this case, use the warning flag
and blue extension guide line to set the
target parking position.

349

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

CAUTION
● The warning flag is only a guide. Be sure
to directly check your surroundings and
behind the vehicle for safety, and back
up carefully.
● Always check that there are no obstacles in the blue frame or between your
vehicle and the parking space, and that
the warning flag and extension guide
line do not overlap any parked vehicles
or walls.
If there are obstacles in the blue frame
or between your vehicle and the parking
space, or the warning flag or extension
guide line overlaps a parked vehicle or
wall, there is a danger of collision. In this
case, do not use the parallel parking
assist mode. The same applies if the
blue frame overlaps the shoulder.

CAUTION
● When the shift position has been shifted
to R (as in step 4 of “WHEN THE PRESUPPORT FUNCTION IS NOT IN
USE”), if the perpendicular parking
assist mode screen on page 335 has
been switched to via the easy set function, touch
to cancel.

350

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

CAUTION
● When backing up, be sure to check your
surroundings and behind the vehicle for
safety, and back up slowly, depressing
the brake pedal to control vehicle speed.
● If a collision seems likely, depress the
brake pedal to stop the vehicle, then disable the system by touching
on the
screen.

Once the vehicle is mostly within the
target parking position, voice guidance
will give a message, and parallel parking assist mode will finish.

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

351

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

TIPS FOR SETTING THE
TARGET PARKING POSITION
Useful information for setting the target
parking position (blue frame)

■USING THE ARROWS ON THE
SCREEN

By touching the arrows displayed on the
screen, you can move the blue frame.
 Adjusting the left-right alignment first will
make subsequent alignment easier.

ALIGNING THE BLUE FRAME
There are two ways to align the blue
frame with the parking space, either using the arrows on the screen, or by
touching the screen at points other than
the arrows.

352

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

■DIRECTLY TOUCHING THE TARGET POINT

By touching the point you wish to move
the frame to, you can move the blue
frame.

Touch the front edge of the place you
wish to move.

The frame will be moved as shown.

IF THERE IS A SLOPE IN THE
ROAD
The assisted parking position will move
left or right of the set target parking position.

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

INFORMATION

● If you touch the following areas, the blue
frame will not move:
• The area surrounding the arrows.
• The area near the lower screen button
on the screen.
• Areas too far away to park in the range
of 34.4 ft. (10.5 m) or more behind the
current position, and/or 16.4 ft. (5.0 m)
or more either left or right from the current position.

353

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

In this case, if you align the warning flag
with the rear of the forward parked vehicle, and the blue extension guide line
with the lower edge of the parked vehicle’s rear wheel when setting the target
parking position, the left side of your vehicle will be roughly in line with the left
side of the front parked vehicle once assisted parking is complete. (If you are
parallel parking on the opposite side of
the road, left and right will be reversed.)

CAUTION
● If the parked vehicle is narrow, or parked
close to the shoulder, the assisted parking position may be quite close to the
shoulder. If the vehicle seems likely to
hit or mount the shoulder, depress the
brake pedal to stop the vehicle, and disable the system by touching
.
Narrow

354

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

5. WHAT TO DO WHEN THIS SORT OF MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED
WHAT TO DO WHEN THIS SORT OF MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED
Cause

What to do

“! Check APGS. Have
your vehicle checked by
a dealer.”

There is a malfunction in the system.

Have your vehicle checked by
your Toyota dealer.

“! APGS can only be
used on a flat surface.”

 The vehicle has rolled forward
on a sloped road.
 The vehicle does not move
even if you take your foot off
the brake pedal.

Do not attempt to use the system in those sorts of conditions.

“! APGS cannot assist
under the current conditions.”

If the message is displayed only
when the system is operating, it
is likely that the tires are worn, or
tire inflation pressure is low.

Check tires for wear and pressure.

If the message is displayed constantly, there is most likely a malfunction.

Turn the “POWER” switch to
OFF, then to ON mode. If the
message is still displayed, have
the vehicle checked by your
Toyota dealer.

The vehicle has skidded or the
tires have been locked.

Do not attempt to use the system on a slippery road such as
snowy road.

The system
overheated.

temporarily

Turn the “POWER” switch to
OFF, then to ON mode. Wait a
few moments before use.

There is a malfunction in the
voice guidance system.

Have your vehicle checked by
your Toyota dealer.

The hybrid system has not been
started.

Turn the “POWER” switch to
ON mode and start the hybrid
system. If the message is still
displayed, have the vehicle
checked by your Toyota dealer.

“! APGS is not available
now.”

“! Release the parking
brake.”

has

The parking brake has been applied.

Release the parking brake.

355

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

Message

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

Message

Cause

What to do

“! Too much force is being applied to the steering wheel.”

You are exerting too much pressure on the steering wheel.

Loosen your grip on the steering wheel.

“Steering position is not
straight. Turn the steering wheel to left (or
right).”

The steering
straight.

Straighten the steering wheel.

“! Parking position has
not been set.”

You have begun to back up without touching “OK”.

Stop the vehicle and touch
“OK”.

“! Vehicle is moving too
fast.”

The speed at which you are
backing up is too fast.

Back up at a speed that does
not cause the warning chime to
sound, using the brake pedal.
The system will be disabled if
you back up too quickly.

“! APGS canceled
user operation.”

You have turned the steering
wheel or depressed the accelerator pedal during the assist
mode.

The system has been disabled,
so restart from the beginning.

“! Accelerator pedal has
been depressed.”

You have depressed the accelerator pedal when setting the target parking position.

Do not depress the accelerator
pedal.

“! Guidance is unavailable.”

Some sort of malfunction has occurred within the system.

Have the vehicle checked by
your Toyota dealer.

—

Take your vehicle to your
Toyota dealer.

“! Clean the parking sonar sensors.”

In extreme cold weather or foreign matter gets on the sensors.

Have the vehicle checked by
your Toyota dealer.

“APGS will start after
backing up slightly.”

The vehicle is too far away from
the parking space.

Reverse straight from this location until two beeps sound.

“! System not ready.”

wheel

not

356

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

Message

Cause

What to do

“A parking position could
not be identified.”

A potential parking space has not
been detected by the sensor.

Use the pre-support function in
an area with parking spaces.

“The space is not large
enough to use APGS.”

The sensor has detected a small
parking space, and parking by
APGS cannot be carried out.

Use the pre-support function in
an area with a larger parking
space.

“APGS is not available
from this position.”

The easy set function cannot be
used from this location.

Move to a location from which
parking can commence.

“! APGS has been cancelled.”

The speed at which the vehicle is
moving forward is too fast.

Reduce the speed a little more
and use the pre-support function.

“The back door is open.
Do not use the backup
camera unless back
door
is
completely
closed.”

The back door is open.

Close the back door completely.

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
9

357

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

MESSAGE AND VOICE GUIDANCE
In the parallel parking assist mode and parking assist mode, voice guidance accompanies the following messages displayed during parking position setting
and steering wheel control. (Voice guidance may not be given depending on the
reason the message was displayed.)
Voice Guidance (Warning tone)

Message

During setting

During steering wheel control

“! Check APGS. Have
your vehicle checked by
a dealer.”

(One chime)

(Two beeps) The guidance has
been canceled.

“! APGS cannot assist
under the current conditions.”

—

(Two beeps) The guidance has
been canceled.

“! APGS is not available
now.”

(One chime)

(Two beeps) The guidance has
been canceled.

“! Release the parking
brake.”

(One chime)

(Two beeps) The guidance has
been canceled.

“! Parking position has
not been set.”

(One chime)

—

(Several beeps and then two
beeps) The guidance has been
canceled.

—

(Two beeps) The guidance has
been canceled.

“! Vehicle is moving too
fast.”
“! APGS canceled
user operation.”

For the adjustment of the volume, ask your Toyota dealer.

358

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

WHEN A RED FRAME IS
DISPLAYED IN THE ASSIST
MODE
If the frame turns red and the message
“Adjust the frame to the target.” is displayed while setting the target parking
position, you cannot use the assist
mode.
In this situation, move the target parking position, or move the position of the
vehicle.
The frame may be displayed in red, depending on the location and angle of the
vehicle when “R” is selected.

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

Furthermore, even if the frame is displayed in blue, if you move the frame to
a location unsuitable for parking using
the assist mode, the frame will change
to red.

359

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

6. MANUAL GUIDE LINE DISPLAY MODE
EXAMPLE OF HOW TO USE
THE SYSTEM WHEN
PARKING (PERPENDICULAR
PARKING)
ESTIMATED PATH GUIDANCE
MODE
The following example describes the
procedure for pulling into a parking
space on the left. For pulling into a
parking space on the right, substitute
right for left and vice versa in all steps.

Shift to “R”.

 If the system is in the assist mode on:
 Touch
on the screen.
 If the system is not in the estimated path
guide line display:
 Touch
or
on the screen.

While referring to the screen and mirrors, back into the parking space.

Turn the steering wheel so that the estimated path guide lines are within the
parking space, and back up carefully.

360

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

When the vehicle is within the parking
space, turn the steering wheel so that
the vehicle width extension guide lines
and the clearance to the left and right
of the parking space are about the
same near the vehicle. Back up slowly.

Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle width extension guide lines are
parallel with the parking space lines.
When the lines are parallel, straighten
the steering wheel and back up slowly.

 Even if the distance guide line and the
parking space rear edge appear to be parallel on the screen, in reality they may not
be parallel.

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
9

361

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

 When there is only one line dividing the
spaces in a parking lot, even if the vehicle
width extension guide lines and the parking space right side (left side) appear to be
parallel on the screen, in reality they may
not be parallel.

PARKING ASSIST GUIDE LINE
DISPLAY MODE
The following example describes the
procedure for pulling into a parking
space on the left. For pulling into a parking space on the right, substitute right for
left and vice versa in all steps.

INFORMATION

● The guide lines and buttons will not display if the back door is open. To display
them, close the back door completely.

Shift to “R”.

 If the system is in the assist mode on:
 Touch
on the screen.
 If the system is not in the parking assist
guide line display:
 Touch
or
on the screen.

While referring to the screen and mirrors, back into the parking space.

362

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

Back up until the parking assist guidelines meet the left edge of the parking
space. Stop the vehicle, turn the steering wheel all the way to the right, and
back up the vehicle to park.

 The point at which turn the steering wheel
depends on the width of the parking
space.

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
9

363

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle width extension guide lines are
parallel with the parking space lines.
When the lines are parallel, straighten
the steering wheel and back up slowly.

 Even if the distance guide line and the
parking space rear edge appear to be parallel on the screen, in reality they may not
be parallel.

INFORMATION

● The guide lines and buttons will not display if the back door is open. To display
them, close the back door completely.

364

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

EXAMPLE OF HOW TO USE
THE SYSTEM WHEN
PARALLEL PARKING
The following example describes the
procedure for pulling into a parking
space on the right. For pulling into a
parking space on the left, substitute left
for right and vice versa in all steps.

Shift to “R”.

Desired parking
location

Back up until the parking assist guide
lines meet the edge of the desired
parking location. Turn the steering
wheel all the way to the left and back
up slowly.

When the vehicle is parallel with the
shoulder of the road, straighten the
steering wheel and back up slowly.

NOTICE
● When backing up, do not forget to pay
attention to the front and back up slowly,
so as not to hit any vehicle parked in
front with the front corner of your vehicle.

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
9

365

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

7. USAGE PRECAUTIONS
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
● Never depend on the advanced parking
guidance system entirely when backing
up. Always make sure your intended
path is clear.
Use caution, just as you would when
backing up any vehicle.
● Never back up while looking only at the
screen. The image on the screen is different from actual conditions. Depicted
distances between objects and flat surfaces will differ from actual distances. If
you back up while looking only at the
screen, you may hit a vehicle, a person
or an object. When backing up, be sure
to check behind and all around the vehicle visually and with mirrors before proceeding.
● Back up slowly, using the brake pedal to
control the vehicle’s speed.
● If you seem likely to hit nearby vehicles,
obstacles or people, depress the brake
pedal to stop the vehicle, and then disable the system by touching
on the
screen.
● Use the system for flat spaces.

CAUTION
● As the steering wheel moves automatically in the parallel parking assist mode
and parking assist mode, be aware of
the following points:
• Keep clothing such as neckties,
scarves and long sleeves away from
the steering wheel, as they may
become entangled. Also, keep children
away from the steering wheel.
• If you have long fingernails, be careful
not to injure yourself when the steering
wheel moves.
• If there is a problem, stop the vehicle
and disable the system by touching
on the screen.
● Be sure to check that the vehicle can
actually park in the target space before
beginning operation.

366

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

CAUTION

● Do not use tires other than those
installed by the manufacturer, as the
system may not function correctly. Furthermore, if you change the tires, there
may be errors in the positions of the
lines and frames displayed on the
screen. If you wish to change your tires,
see your Toyota dealer.
● In the following conditions, assisted
parking in the set parking position may
not be possible:
• The tires are extremely worn, or the
tire inflation pressure is low
• You are carrying an extremely heavy
load
• There is a load in one side of the vehicle only, causing the vehicle to lean
• Tires have received a strong impact,
such as bumping against a curb,
resulting in improper wheel alignment
If there is a large difference between the
set parking space and the vehicle position in any situations other than those
above, consult with your Toyota dealer.
● Use your own eyes to confirm the vehicle’s surroundings, as the displayed
image may become faint or dark, and
moving images will be distorted, or not
entirely visible when the outside temperature is low. When backing up, be sure
to check behind and all around the vehicle visually and with mirror before proceeding.

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

● Do not use the system in the following
conditions:
• Outside of parking areas
• In unprepared parking area such as
gravel or sand
• In parking areas that are crooked or
have level variations
• On slippery or icy roads, or in snow
• If the asphalt is melted due to harsh
sunlight
• If there are obstacles in the target
parking position (inside the blue
frame), or obstacles between the vehicle and the parking space
• If there are a large number of vehicles
or pedestrians passing
• In areas unsuitable for parking (overly
small parking space, cliff etc.)
• If the image is hard to see due to dirt,
direct sunlight, shadow or snow on the
camera lens
• If you are using tire chains or emergency tire(s)
● Do not use the system when the back
door is not completely closed.

CAUTION

367

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

AREA DISPLAYED ON
SCREEN
The image displayed on the screen is
an approximation only.

INFORMATION

● In the following cases, it may become
difficult to see the images on the screen,
even when the system is functioning:
• In the dark (for example, at night)
• When the temperature near the lens is
extremely high or low
• When water droplets are adhering to
the camera, or when humidity is high
(for example, when it rains)
• When foreign matter (for example,
snow or mud) adheres to the camera
lens
• When the camera has scratches or dirt
on it
• When the sun or the beam of headlights is shining directly into the camera lens
• If a bright light (for example, sunlight
reflected off the vehicle body) is picked
up by the camera, the smear effect*,
peculiar to the CCD camera, may
occur.

Corners of bumper
INFORMATION

● The area displayed on the screen may
vary according to vehicle orientation or
road conditions.
● The area covered by the camera is limited. Objects which are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper cannot be seen on the screen.
● The camera uses a special lens. The
distance of the image that appears on
the screen differs from the actual distance.

368

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

INFORMATION

● When the camera is used under fluorescent lights, sodium lights or mercury
lights etc., the lights and the illuminated
areas may appear to flicker.
● If you install the antenna of a wireless
device close to the camera, the screen
image may be affected by the electromagnetic waves, and the system may
not function correctly. Install an antenna
away from the camera.
● The method for adjusting the picture
quality of the advanced parking guidance system is the same as that for the
navigation screen.

The advanced parking guidance system camera is located as shown in the
illustration.

● If you do not observe the following precautions, the advanced parking guidance system may not operate correctly,
possibly leading to an accident:
• If the back of the vehicle is hit, the
position and mounting angle of the
camera may change. Be sure to have
the camera’s position and mounting
angle checked at your Toyota dealer.
• As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble
or modify it. This may cause incorrect
operation.
• If you scrape the camera cover, or
scrub it with a hard brush or an abrasive agent, you may scratch the cover,
leading to poor picture quality.
• Do not allow organic solvent, car wax,
window cleaner or paint coating to
adhere to the camera. If this happens,
wipe it off as soon as possible.
• If the temperature changes rapidly,
such as when hot water is poured on
the vehicle in cold weather, the system
may not operate normally.
• If the camera is subjected to a collision, or the camera orientation confirmation lines are not in line with the
bumper, it is likely that the camera
position or angle of installation has
become crooked. See your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible.
• If the camera lens becomes dirty, it
cannot transmit a clear image.
If water droplets, snow, or mud adhere
to the lens, rinse with water and wipe
with a soft cloth. If the lens is extremely
dirty, wash it with a mild cleanser and
rinse.

369

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

THE ADVANCED PARKING
GUIDANCE SYSTEM
CAMERA

CAUTION

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

NOTICE
● When replacing the tires, please consult
any your Toyota dealer. If you replace
the tires, the position of the guide lines
displayed on the screen may change.
● Do not hit the camera or subject it to
strong impact as this may cause its position and mounting angle to change.
● When washing the vehicle, do not apply
intensive bursts of water to the camera
or camera area. Doing so may result in
the camera malfunctioning.

DIFFERENCES BETWEEN
THE DISPLAY AND THE
ACTUAL ROAD
In any of the following situations, there
is a margin of error between the set target parking position and guide lines on
the screen, and the actual distance/
course on the road.
WHEN THE GRADE BEHIND
THE VEHICLE SLOPES UP
SHARPLY

Objects appear to be farther away than
they actually are.

370

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

WHEN THE GRADE BEHIND
THE VEHICLE SLOPES DOWN
SHARPLY

WHEN ANY PART OF THE
VEHICLE SAGS DUE TO THE
NUMBER OF PASSENGERS OR
THE DISTRIBUTION OF THE
LOAD

Objects appear to be closer than they
actually are.

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

There is a margin of error between the
set target parking position and guide
lines on the screen, and the actual distance/course on the road.

371

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

WHEN A THREE-DIMENSIONAL
OBJECT IS NEARBY
The guide on the screen targets a flatsurfaced object (road etc).
When a three-dimensional object which
juts out (an obstacle such as a truck bed)
is nearby, observe the following precautions, being careful not to collide with the
object.

ESTIMATED PATH GUIDANCE
MODE
The estimated path guide lines are displayed according to flat surfaces (such as
the road). It is not possible to determine
the position of three-dimensional objects
(such as vehicles) using the estimated
path guide lines.

In the case shown above, the truck appears to be outside of the estimated
path guide lines and the vehicle does
not look as if it will hit the truck. However, the width of the truck extends out
from the truck in a line, and this line may
actually be on the estimated path guide
lines.
In reality if you back up as guided by the
estimated path guide lines, the vehicle
may hit the truck.
Similarly, when the estimated path guide
lines pass near any object(s) or obstacle(s), be sure to check the area behind
and around the vehicle visually.

The width
of the truck

372

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

DISTANCE GUIDE LINE
The distance that appears on the screen
between three-dimensional objects (such
as vehicles) and flat surfaces (such as the
road) and the actual distance differ as follows.

SENSOR
Parking spaces are detected by the
sensors on both ends of the front
bumper, thus making parking position
identification easier.

Approx.
3 ft. (1 m)

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

 The distance that appears on the screen
between three-dimensional objects (such
as vehicles) and flat surfaces (such as the
road) differs from the actual distance as
follows.
• In reality,
=
<
(
and
are
equally far away;
is farther than
and ). However, on the screen, the situation appears to be
<
< .
• On the screen, it appears that a truck is
parked approximately 3 ft. (1 m) away.
However, in reality if you back up to point
, you will hit the truck.

373

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

SENSOR DETECTION RANGE
WHEN IN PERPENDICULAR
PARKING ASSIST MODE

SENSOR DETECTION RANGE
WHEN IN PARALLEL PARKING
ASSIST MODE

CAUTION
● A sensor may not operate properly in the
following situations:
• There is ice, snow or mud on the sensor. (When it is removed, the normal
operation will return.)
• The sensor is frozen. (When the sensor warms up, it will return to normal.)
At low temperatures in particular, sensors that are frozen may not detect a
parked vehicle.
• The sensor is covered in any way.
• When the vehicle is tilted.
• In extreme hot or cold weather.
• When driving on bumpy roads, slopes,
gravelled roads or grass.
• Devices issuing ultrasonic waves are
operated around your vehicle, such as
a horn from another vehicle, motorcycle engine, air braking sound from
heavy-duty vehicles.
• When rain or water is splashed over
the vehicle.
• When a radio antenna or fender pole is
mounted on your vehicle.
• The sensor approaches too close to a
parked vehicle.
• The bumper or sensor receives a
strong impact.
● Do not attach any accessories within the
detection range of the sensors.

374

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

INITIALIZING THE SYSTEM
Make sure to initialize the system in the
following situations.
 The 12-volt battery is disconnected and
reconnected.
 The system initialization in progress
screen is displayed when the shift position is moved to the “R” (due to low battery etc.).

INFORMATION

● The help screen appears when
is
touched. Make a correction using the
following method in accordance with the
display.

When the screen returns to the original
display, correction is complete.
If the above screen remains, have the
vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer.
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

HOW TO CORRECT
When the vehicle is stopped, turn the
steering wheel all the way to the left,
then all the way to the right. (It does not
matter in which direction-right or left-you
turn first.)
When the screen returns to the original
display, correction is complete.

NOTICE
● If the above screen remains, have the
vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer.

375

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM

376

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

INDEX
1

377

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

ALPHABETICAL INDEX
A
Adding destinations................................... 85
Address book .......................................... 101
Address book entries .............................. 101
Advanced parking guidance system .......322
Advanced parking guidance
system camera ................................ 369
Area displayed on screen....................368
Differences between the display
and the actual road ..........................370
Driving precautions.............................. 366
Easy set function .................................331
Example of how to use the system
when parallel parking.......................365
Example of how to use the system
when parking (Perpendicular
parking)............................................360
If a message appears
on the screen ................................... 310
Initializing the system ..........................375

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

Audio .......................................................190
Audio language code ..............................227
Audio settings..........................................264
HD Radio™ system settings................264
iPod settings ........................................265
Audio/video remote controls
(Steering switches) ..............................252
Audio/video system .................................190
Audio/video system operating hints ........254
Caring for your DVD player
and disc............................................256
CD-R and CD-RW discs ......................260
iPod .....................................................255
MP3/WMA files ....................................258
Radio reception ...................................254
Terms ..................................................260
USB memory .......................................256
Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL) ...........195
AUX port..................................................198

Introduction.......................................... 322

Maneuvering when parking .................324

Basic function............................................26

Manual guide line display mode ..........360
Operating procedure ................... 333, 345
Parallel parking assist mode ...............344
Parking assist mode
(Perpendicular parking) ................... 330
Pre-support function ....................330, 344
Pre-support switch...............................323
Sensor .................................................373
Tips for setting the
target parking position ............. 340, 352
Usage precautions .............................. 366
What to do when this sort of
message is displayed ...................... 355
When a red frame is displayed
in the assist mode............................359
When a three-dimensional object
is nearby .......................................... 372

Bluetooth® ...............................................130
Bluetooth® audio .....................................242
Connecting a Bluetooth® audio
player ...............................................245
Playing Bluetooth® audio.....................247
Bluetooth® phone....................................137
Bluetooth® phone message function.......152
Checking messages ............................152
New message notification....................154
Replying (Quick reply) .........................153
Bluetooth® settings .................................177
Detailed Bluetooth® settings................184
Registered devices ..............................177
Selecting a Bluetooth® phone .............181
Selecting portable player .....................183
Brightness .........................................31, 224

AM...........................................................199
Apps........................................................ 304
378

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

C
Call on the Bluetooth® phone ................. 141
By call history ...................................... 143
By dial ................................................. 141
By phonebook ..................................... 141
By POI call .......................................... 147
By speed dial....................................... 143
By voice recognition ............................ 145
Calling using an SMS/MMS
message .......................................... 147
CD........................................................... 213
CLOSE button......................................... 190
Color ................................................. 47, 224
Command list.......................................... 277
Contrast ............................................ 31, 224
Current position calibration ..................... 117

Dial.................................................. 141, 145
Distance and time to destination............... 84
DSP control............................................. 195
DVD ........................................................213
DVD player..............................................213
DVD options ........................................222
DVD player and DVD video disc
information ....................................... 231
Ejecting a disc ..................................... 213
If the player malfunctions ....................230
Inserting a disc .................................... 213
Operating a DVD disc.......................... 219
Playing a disc ......................................214
Playing a DVD disc..............................220
Playing an audio disc .......................... 214
Playing an MP3/WMA disc .................. 216

Current position display ............................ 33

Emergency................................................68

Deleting destinations ................................ 86
Deleting personal data.............................. 51
Deleting previous destinations................ 110
Deleting set destinations........................... 72
DEST button ............................................. 10
“Destination” screen.................................. 20
Destination search .................................... 56
By “Address” ......................................... 58
By “Address Book” ................................ 68
By “Coordinates” ................................... 72
By “Emergency” .................................... 68
By home ................................................ 57
By “Intersection & Freeway”.................. 69
By “Map”................................................ 71
By “Point of Interest” ............................. 61
By preset destinations........................... 57

Entune.....................................................304
Expanded voice commands....................276

F
FM...........................................................199
Fuel consumption.................................... 282
Function index...........................................18

G
General settings........................................43
GPS (Global Positioning System) .....10, 126

H
HD Radio™............................................. 202
Heading-up screen.................................... 41
Home ......................................12, 17, 57, 97

By “Previous Destinations”.................... 67
Selecting the search area ..................... 56
Detailed navigation settings.................... 112
Detour setting ........................................... 87
379

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

ALPHABETICAL INDEX
I

INFO/APPS (INFO) button........................ 10

Operation flow: Guiding the route .............16

Information ..............................................282

Orientation of the map...............................41

“Information” screen.................................. 24

Overview button and guidance screen......10

Inputting letters and numbers ................... 28
Internet radio broadcast ..........................212

iPod.........................................................238

Pausing guidance......................................91

Connecting iPod ..................................238

Peripheral monitoring system..................318

Playing iPod ........................................ 238

Phone......................................................130

Phone (Hands-free system for
cellular phone) .....................................132

Keyboard layout ........................................ 47

About the phonebook in this system....134

Using the steering switches.................134

Language .................................................. 46

When selling or disposing of
the vehicle........................................135

Limitations of the navigation system .......126
List screen operation................................. 28

M
MAP .......................................................... 71
Map database information
and updates.........................................384
Map database version and
coverage area ..................................... 283
Map icons.................................................. 42
Map scale.................................................. 41
MAP/VOICE button ................................... 10
MEDIA button.......................................... 190

Using the phone switch .......................133

PHONE button ........................................130
Phone settings ........................................155
Message settings.................................170
Phone display settings.........................174
Phone sound settings ..........................155
Phonebook ..........................................157
Phonebook ......................................141, 157
POI call....................................................147
POI icons...................................................92
Point of Interest .........................................61
Preset destinations..............................14, 57
Previous destinations ................................67

MP3.........................................................216

PWR VOL knob.......................................190

Natural speech information ..................... 274

Quick guide ...............................................10

Navigation system..................................... 56

Quick reference.........................20, 130, 190

North-up screen ........................................ 41

380

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

Radio ...................................................... 199

Satellite radio (SAT)................................194

Listening to the radio........................... 199

Screen adjustment .................................... 31

Presetting a station ............................. 199

Screen Off................................................. 31

Radio broadcast data system.............. 200

Screen scroll operation .............................33

Selecting a station............................... 200

Screen settings adjustment....................... 31

Traffic announcement ......................... 201

Screens for navigation settings................. 96

Radio broadcast data system ................. 200

SEEK/TRACK button ..............................190

RADIO button ......................................... 190

Setting home as the destination................17

Rear view monitor system ...................... 318

Setting up the “Address Book” ................ 101

Area displayed on screen.................... 320

Setting up the “Areas to Avoid” ............... 106

Rear view monitor system camera...... 320

Setting up the “Home”............................... 97

Receive on the Bluetooth® phone .......... 148

Setting up the “Preset Destinations” .........99

SETUP button ...........................10, 130, 190

Connecting a Bluetooth® phone.......... 138

“Setup” screen ..........................................22

Reconnecting the Bluetooth®
phone............................................... 140

Show on map ............................................ 92

Registering home...................................... 12

Speed dial ............................................... 143

Registering preset destinations ................ 14
Reordering destinations............................ 85
Resuming guidance .................................. 91
Route guidance......................................... 74
Route guidance screen............................. 78
Route overview ......................................... 88

SMS/MMS message ....................... 147, 152
Standard map icons ..................................42
Starting route guidance.............................74
Steering switches.................... 134, 252, 268
Surround .................................................195
Switching the screens ............................... 38

Route preference ...................................... 89
Route trace ............................................... 95

381

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

ALPHABETICAL INDEX
T

Talk on the Bluetooth phone.................149

XM Fuel Prices........................................292

Incoming call waiting ........................... 151

Show XM Fuel Prices information .......292

Time zone ................................................. 45

View detailed fuel price information.....292

Tire change calibration............................117

XM Fuel Prices settings.......................293

Tone........................................................ 224

XM NavTraffic® .......................................298

Tone and balance ................................... 195

Show traffic event ................................298

Touch screen operation ............................ 27

Show XM Navtraffic® information ........299

Traffic incidents.......................................298

XM NavWeather™ ..................................295

TUNE SCROLL knob .............................. 190
Typical voice guidance prompts................ 81

Show XM NavWeather™
information .......................................295

Weather warnings................................297

USB memory........................................... 233
Connecting a USB memory.................233
Playing a USB memory .......................234

Weather information ............................296
XM NavWeather™ indicator ................297
XM Satellite Radio broadcast..................206
Channel category ................................208

USB port .................................................198

Displaying the radio ID ........................207

How to subscribe to an
XM Satellite Radio ...........................206

Vehicle settings.......................................120
Maintenance........................................ 120
Vehicle customization..........................125
Voice command system..................193, 268
Steering switches for the
voice command system ................... 268
Voice recognition ....................................145
Voice settings............................................ 52
Voice volume ............................................ 53

W
WMA ....................................... 216, 258, 260

Displaying the title and name ..............209

If the satellite radio tuner
malfunctions.....................................210
Listening to satellite radio ....................207
Presetting a channel............................208
Selecting a channel .............................208
XM Sports ...............................................286
Receive sports information ..................286
XM Sports settings ..............................287
XM Stocks ...............................................289
Receive stock data ..............................289
XM Stocks settings ..............................290

Z
Zoom in button ..........................................10
Zoom out button ........................................10

382

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

383

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

Map database information and updates
This system uses the maps of DENSO.
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
PLEASE READ THIS AGREEMENT
CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
THIS IS A LICENSE AGREEMENT
FOR YOUR COPY OF THE SPATIAL
MAP
DATABASE,
INCLUDING
LOCATION CODES AND RELATED
PRODUCTS (COLLECTIVELY, THE
“DATABASE”), USED IN THE
NAVIGATION SYSTEM. BY USING
THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM AND
THE DATABASE, YOU ACCEPT
AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ALL
TERMS AND CONDITIONS SET
FORTH BELOW.
LICENSE GRANT
DENSO CORPORATION (“DENSO”),
as a licensed distributor of the
DATABASE, grants to you a
non-exclusive, non-perpetual license
to use your copy of the DATABASE for
your personal use or for your use in
your business’ internal operations and
not for any other purpose. This license
does not include the right to grant
sub-licenses.

OWNERSHIP
The DATABASE and the copyrights
and
intellectual
property
and
neighboring rights therein are owned
by TomTom North America, Inc.
(“TomTom”) and its licensors. This
Agreement does not transfer any title
or interest in the DATABASE, except
for the license to use the DATABASE
according and subject to the terms
and conditions of this Agreement. You
shall not alter, obscure or remove any
copyright notices, trademark notices
or other restrictive legends relating to
the DATABASE.
The
DATABASE
comprises
confidential
and
proprietary
information and materials of TomTom.
Accordingly, you shall hold the
DATABASE in confidence and trust.
You shall take reasonable steps to
protect
the
DATABASE
from
misappropriation or misuse. You shall
not extract stand-alone data from or
publish any part of the DATABASE
without the prior written consent of
TomTom and its licensors.

384

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

LIMITATIONS ON USE

DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY

The DATABASE is restricted for use in
the specific system for which it was
created. Except to the extent explicitly
permitted by mandatory laws, you may
not extract or reutilize any portion of
the contents of the DATABASE, nor
reproduce, copy, duplicate, modify,
adapt,
translate,
disassemble,
decompile, or reverse engineer any
portion of the DATABASE.

THE LICENSED PRODUCTS ARE
PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS” AND
“WITH ALL FAULTS BASIS” AND
TOMTOM AND ITS SUPPLIERS
EXPRESSLY
DISCLAIM
ALL
WARRANTIES,
EXPRESS
OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED
TO,
THE
IMPLIED
WARRANTIES
OF
NONINFRINGEMENT,
MERCHANTABILITY,
SATISFACTORY
QUALITY,
ACCURACY, TITLE AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
NO ORAL OR WRITTEN ADVICE OR
INFORMATION
PROVIDED
BY
TOMTOM OR ANY OF ITS AGENTS,
EMPLOYEES OR THIRD PARTY
PROVIDERS SHALL CREATE A
WARRANTY, AND LICENSEE IS
NOT ENTITLED TO RELY ON ANY
SUCH ADVICE OR INFORMATION.
THIS
DISCLAIMER
OF
WARRANTIES IS AN ESSENTIAL
CONDITION OF THE AGREEMENT.

TRANSFER
You many not transfer the DATABASE
to third parties, except together with
the system for which it was created,
provided that you do not retain any
copy of the DATABASE, and provided
that the transferee agrees to all terms
and conditions of this AGREEMENT.

385

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22

16:15

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

WARNINGS

NEITHER TOMTOM NOR ITS
SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIABLE TO
THE UNDERSIGNED FOR ANY
INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL,
INDIRECT
OR
EXEMPLARY DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF THIS AGREEMENT,
INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR
COSTS OF COVER, LOSS OF USE
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR
THE LIKE, REGARDLESS OF
WHETHER THE PARTY WAS
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES.

The DATABASE comprises facts and
information from government and other
sources reflecting circumstances in
existence before you received the
DATABASE, which may contain errors
and omissions. Accordingly, the
DATABASE may contain inaccurate or
incomplete information due to the
passage
of
time,
changing
circumstances, and due to the nature of
the sources used. The DATABASE
does not include or reflect information
relating to, among other things,
neighborhood safety; law enforcement;
emergency assistance; construction
work; road or lane closures; vehicle or
speed restrictions; road slope or grade;
bridge height, weight or other limits;
road or traffic conditions; special
events; traffic congestion; or travel
time.

NOTWITHSTANDING
ANYTHING
TO THE CONTRARY CONTAINED
HEREIN, TOMTOM SHALL HAVE NO
MONETARY LIABILITY TO THE
UNDERSIGNED FOR ANY CAUSE
(REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF
ACTION) UNDER OR RELATING TO
THIS AGREEMENT.

End Users shall acknowledge that the
use of the Licensed Products with a
non-TomTom map may result in
increased variance between the
location displayed on the map and
ground truth location.
The covenants and obligations
undertaken by the End User herein are
intended for the direct benefit of
TomTom and may be enforced by
TomTom directly against the End User.

386

PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22